Quarterlytics / Technology / Solid State PLC

Solid State PLC

soli · LSE Technology
Claim this profile
Ticker soli
Exchange LSE
Sector Technology
Industry
Employees 201-500
← All annual reports
FY2020 Annual Report · Solid State PLC
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
0 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
CONTENTS 

2.    Directors, Secretary and Advisers  

3.    Chairman’s Statement 

5.    Chief Executive’s Strategic Report 

22.  Corporate and Social Responsibility Report 

25.  Corporate Governance Report 

41.  Audit Committee Report 

46.  Remuneration Committee Report 

60.  Directors’ Report  

64.  Report of the Independent Auditors 

70.  Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income  

71.  Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity 

73.  Consolidated Statement of Financial Position 

74.  Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows  

76.  Notes to the Financial Statements  

118.  Company Statement of Financial Position 

119.  Company Statement of Changes in Equity 

120.  Notes to the Company Financial Statements 

123.  Notice of Annual General Meeting  

1 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors:  

DIRECTORS, SECRETARY AND ADVISERS 

 Peter Haining, FCA, Non-Executive Director and Interim Chairman 
Gary Stephen Marsh, Chief Executive Officer 
 Peter Owen James, BSc FCA, Executive Director 
 John Lawford Macmichael, Executive Director 
Matthew Thomas Richards, Executive Director 
Nigel Foster Rogers, Non-Executive Director (Appointed 1 July 2019) 
Anthony Brian Frere, Non-Executive Chairman (Retired 31 March 2020) 
 John Michael Lavery, Non-Executive Director (Retired 31 August 2019) 

Company Secretary and  
Registered Office:  

Peter Haining, FCA  
Solid State PLC  
2 Ravensbank Business Park 
Hedera Road, Redditch 
B98 9EY 

Company Number:  

00771335  

Nominated Adviser and   
Broker: 

Joint Broker:  

Auditors:  

Solicitors:  

Bankers:  

Registrars:  

Country of Incorporation 
of Parent Company:  

Legal Form: 

Domicile: 

W H Ireland Limited 
24 Martin Lane 
London EC4R 0DR 

finnCap Limited 
60 New Broad Street 
London EC2M 1JJ 

RSM UK Audit LLP 
St Philips Point, Temple Row 
 Birmingham  
West Midlands 
B2 5AF 

Shakespeare Martineau LLP 
1 Colmore Square 
 Birmingham 
West Midlands 
B4 6AA 

Lloyds Bank PLC 
125 Colmore Row 
Birmingham 
West Midlands 
B3 3SF 

Neville Registrars Limited 
Neville House 
 Steelpark Road 
Halesowen 
 B62 8HD 

England and Wales 

Public Limited Company 

United Kingdom 

2 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAIRMAN’S STATEMENT 

Overview of the year 

The financial year ended 31 March 2020 has seen the Group deliver a record performance in terms of revenue and profit, 
having  made  significant  progress  against  its  strategic  objectives.  The  Group’s  strategy  is  to  deliver  growth  both 
organically and through acquisition. These results illustrate our continued commitment to delivering on this strategy.  

During our first full year of ownership of Pacer Technologies, acquired in November 2018, the Value Added Distribution 
(VAD)  division  has  successfully completed  the  integration of Pacer’s  Opto-electronics  business, which will  enable  the 
division to harness effectively the benefits of enlarged scale and customer reach.  

The Group has continued to invest in its R&D activities in the Computing, Power and Opto-electronics business units to 
support  sustainable  margin  improvement.  There  has  been  significant  progress  in  developing  own  brand  computing 
products that will enable the business development team to target Artificial Intelligence (AI) architecture opportunities. 
Our investment in enhanced battery pack designs provide power for autonomous craft in addition to providing solutions 
which fulfil the growing demand to replace fossil fuel motors with an electric power train.  

The Group has invested in business development resource to target new customers and markets across both divisions.  
This will enable the Group to maintain a diversified customer base and maintain the resilience that we have established 
while allowing us to exploit bigger opportunities with our Tier 1 customers. 

Financial overview 

Set out below are the fundamental financial key performance indicators which reflect the record year and a very pleasing 
result: 

KPI 
Reported Revenue 
Proforma Revenue** 
Reported operating profit margin 
Adjusted operating profit margin* 
Reported profit before taxation 
Adjusted profit before taxation* 
Adjusted diluted EPS  
Underlying cash flow  
Net cash/(net debt) 
Dividend 
Open order book @ 31 May 2020 

2020 
£67.4m 
£67.4m 
6.1% 
7.2% 
£4.0m 
£4.7m 
46.3p 
£8.0m 
£3.2m 
12.5p 
£37.9m 

2019 
£56.3m 
£64.7m 
5.2% 
6.5% 
£2.8m 
£3.5m 
35.9p 
£4.0m 
(£2.0m) 
12.5p 
£35.9m 

Change 
+19.7% 
+4.2% 
+90bps 
+70bps 
+42.9% 
+34.3% 
+29.0% 
+103% 
+260% 
- 
+5.6% 

* Adjusted performance metrics are reconciled in note 32. 
**Proforma revenue restates the prior year on a like for like basis to include the £9.4m pre-acquisition Pacer revenue for 2018/19 and excludes £1.0m non-recurring 
electronics revenue as reported in prior year. 

Pleasingly the Group has delivered: 

• 

4% organic sales growth in proforma Group revenue, driven by 8.8% organic growth in  Manufacturing and 1% 
growth in VAD against an electronic component distribution market that experienced a 7% decline 

•  Record  profitability  reflected  in  adjusted  operating  margins  increasing  70bps  to  7.2%,  based  on  margin 

improvement in both divisions and the operational gearing  

•  Record operating cash generation of £8.0m with reported cash conversion of 197% (2019: 168%)  
•  Adjusted fully diluted EPS up 29% to 46.3p (2019: 35.9p) 
• 
•  Dividend maintained – testament to the resilience of the Group’s business model 

5.6% organic growth in the open orderbook at the 31 May 2020 

Strategic Achievements in 2019/2020  

Notable achievements in 2019/20 to advance our strategy included: 

• 

• 
• 

• 

Investment in technology across the Group including our battery pack designs, own brand computing products 
and enhanced production capabilities in the Weymouth value added facility 
Investment in business development resource to target new customers and markets for our technical solutions 
Integration of Pacers Opto-electronics business into VAD to enable the division to leverage the benefits of scale 
and reach 
Investment in ERP systems across the Group 

3 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
CHAIRMAN’S STATEMENT (continued) 

Senior management and corporate governance 

During 2020 Solid State made significant progress in refreshing the Board to take the business through the next phase of 
its development. 

I would like to acknowledge the contribution of both Mr A B Frere and Mr J M Lavery who both retired from the Board 
during the financial year.  

Mr J M Lavery served as both an Executive and Non-Executive Director over his 36 years’ service with Steatite, the last 
17 years with the Group after Steatite was acquired by Solid State in 2002.  

Mr A B Frere served as Chairman for the last six years and nearly 10 years as a Board member. 

Under his chairmanship, Solid State PLC achieved a great deal, making seven acquisitions, considerably broadening its 
product offering, and building a trusted brand whilst developing the business and the governance structures to put the 
business in a strong position looking forward. 

Mr N F Rogers joined the Board on the 1 July 2019 bringing a wealth of business experience. He has made a significant 
contribution during his first year and will be a valuable member of the team as we take the Group forward. 

The  recruitment  process  for  the  new  Non-Executive  Director  and  the  appointment  of  a  full  time  Chairman  is  not  yet 
concluded and is now being hindered by COVID-19 distancing protocols. As a result, I have assumed the role of Interim 
Chairman until such time as a permanent appointment can been made. 

Acquisitions 

Our  stated  strategy  to  further  the  Group’s  development  through  a  combination  of  organic  and  acquisitive  growth is 
unchanged. Whilst progress on our near-term acquisitions is currently paused, the Group remains acquisitive and is at 
the early stage of evaluating several opportunities.  

Pipeline  development  continues  both  on UK bolt-on  targets  and  larger  businesses  that  will  expand  our  international 
sales. The Board will look to be opportunistic should an acquisition target arise as we exit the COVID-19 pandemic and 
we plan to resume these activities as soon as possible.   

Having now repaid the final instalment of our term loan for the acquisition of Pacer Technologies, Solid State is now debt 
free.  With cash at bank of £4.5m as at 31 May 2020 and a recently renewed and unutilised Revolving Credit Facility of 
£7.5m we are well placed to support our acquisition strategy when activities resume. 

Dividend 

The resilience of the Group’s business model and the strong cash position gives the Board confidence in recommending 
a final dividend despite the current challenging environment.  Solid State plc has paid a dividend every year since joining 
AIM  in  1996.    The  Group’s  stated  dividend  cover  range  is  between  2.5  and  3.0  times.    However,  given  the  current 
exceptional circumstances the Board considered it prudent when recommending a final dividend to temporarily increase 
cover  this  year  to  3.75  times.  Next  year,  depending  on  the  market  backdrop,  we  will  aim  to  return  to  our  targeted 
dividend cover range.  The Board is proposing to maintain last year’s dividend meaning a final dividend of 7.25p (2019: 
8.3p), giving a full year dividend of 12.5p (2019: 12.5p).   

Subject to approval of the final dividend by shareholders at the AGM on 9 September 2020, the final dividend will be 
paid on 23 September 2020 to shareholders on the register at the close of business on the 4 September 2020.  The shares 
will be marked ex-dividend on 3 September 2020. 

4 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAIRMAN’S STATEMENT (continued) 

Opportunities and prospects for 2020/2021  

Whilst  the  forthcoming  period  will  no  doubt  be  dominated  by  the  effects  of  COVID-19,  the  Group  is  well  placed  to 
weather the current crisis and emerge in a stronger position than many of its competitors.  Although the Group is seeing 
and expecting some slowdown in order intake during this financial year, its diverse sector exposure and strong open 
order book will provide some resilience.  

The Group’s business model now serves a wide customer base of over 1500 clients, operating across multiple sectors, 
offering a broad product range with decentralised production across the UK. This diversification provides the Group with 
a resilience when markets are challenging. The Group’s most recent acquisition of Pacer Technologies further diversified 
the Group and greatly improved its access and offering to the medical sector, which has been relatively strong during 
the COVID-19 pandemic. 

We expect sectors such as oil & gas and commercial aviation will continue to be impacted in addition to the softness in 
demand for computing products for certain niche applications. That said, the Board believes demand for image capture, 
processing, and transmission post COVID-19 will see significant growth in the medium term, driven by increased adoption 
of  industrial  AI  and  the  roll  out  of  5G.  The  Group  is  equally  seeing  other  sectors,  notably  medical  and  food  retail, 
delivering strong sustained demand providing some mitigation to the adversely impacted market sectors.  

While risks outside COVID-19 remain, the Group continues to benefit from opportunities in its core markets as noted 
above. The Group has traditional strength in serving the security and defence sector, furthermore it is well placed to 
benefit from any shift by Prime Contractors away from a globalised supply chain to buying more of their vital electronics 
and services closer to home.  

The Group continues to drive cross selling initiatives. The VAD division is seeking opportunities requiring higher levels of 
technical  integration,  that  can  be  fulfilled  though  collaboration  with  the  Manufacturing  division.  Two  notable  
programmes  are  expected  to  start  in  2020  leveraging  the full  capabilities  of  the Group,  bringing new  and  previously 
unattainable opportunities to the business. 

The focus for future growth remains on high reliability, harsh environment applications where we can add value. New 
applications in robotics solutions and fossil fuel replacement are being targeted in varied market sectors including land 
based,  sea  and  subsea. The Group  is  taking  care  to  select markets  for  its  products  and  solutions  that  have  not  been 
commoditised. 

We have found new ways to engage with clients including virtual “hands-on” design and specification meetings and more 
of our marketing budget will be re-deployed to continue these innovations.   

Entering the year with the strong open order book has meant trading in the first quarter has been broadly in-line with 
prior year and ahead of management expectations. While we have been able to maintain a good open order book the 
Q1 order intake is down just under 15% compared to prior year, as a result of COVID-19.  

The  outlook  remains  difficult  to  predict,  however  the  Board  is  confident  that  given  its  niches  in  sectors  currently  in 
demand and those likely to be in receipt of government stimulus packages, for example in transportation and medical, 
it is well placed to navigate these exceptional trading conditions.    

P Haining 
Interim Chairman 
30 June 2020 

5 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S STRATEGIC REPORT 

Introduction to Solid State PLC 

Comprised of two divisions but with a shared mission, strategy and consistent business values, Solid State thrives on  a 
trusted  advisor  relationship  with  its  customers.  Solid  State  provides  technology  solutions,  primarily  designed  for 
demanding applications, safely, reliably, and swiftly freeing customers to focus on their core business with confidence.  

Solid State’s mission and strategy to deliver growth 

The Group’s mission is “To remain at the forefront of electronics technology, delivering reliable, high quality products 
and services.  Adding value at every opportunity, from enquiry to order fulfilment; consistently meeting customer and 
partner expectations.” 

The stated strategy is to supplement organic growth with selective acquisitions within the electronics industry which will 
complement our existing Group companies and over time deliver improved operating margins through the delivery of 
operational efficiencies, scale and distribution.   

The strategy to deliver this has three key elements: 

1) 

Investment  in  people,  technical  knowledge,  and  resources  to  ensure  Solid  State  remains  at  the  forefront  of 
electronics  technology.  To constantly  seek  opportunity  to add  value  meeting  our  customers’  unmet  needs  and 
establishing long term relationships as a trusted advisor and subject matter experts; 

2)  Targeting  strategic  acquisitions which  are  aligned  with  Solid  State’s  core  capabilities  and  provide  access  to  new 
markets or deepen the Group’s knowledge and ability, whilst enhancing the value it can add for its customers; and, 
3)  Continue to develop strategic partnerships with customers and suppliers within the electronics industry, building 

its portfolio of value added services. 

The Group is focused on the supply and support of specialist electronics equipment through its Value Added Distribution 
(‘VAD’)  and Manufacturing  divisions. The VAD  division  is  a market leader  in  delivering  innovative,  valuable,  technical 
solutions for customers seeking specialist, electronic and opto-electronic components and displays. 

The  Manufacturing  division  is  a  market  leader  in  the  design,  development  and  supply  of  high  specification  rugged 
computers, custom battery packs providing portable power and energy storage solutions and advanced communication 
systems, encompassing wideband antennas and high performance video transmission products. 

The  market  for  the  Group’s  products  and  services  is  driven  by  the  need  for  bespoke  electronic  solutions  to  address 
complex  needs,  typically  in  harsh  environments  where  enhanced  durability  and  resistance  to  extreme  and  volatile 
humidity,  temperature,  pressure  and  wind  is  vital.  The  drivers  of  value  in  its  markets  include  safety,  technical 
performance, efficiency improvements, cost savings, and environmental monitoring. 

Value Added Distribution (’VAD’) division 

The Group’s VAD division has two business units; electronics and opto-electronics. The division focuses on serving the 
needs of the original equipment manufacturing (OEM) and the contract electronics manufacturing (CEM) communities 
in the UK, principally from its operations in Redditch, Pangbourne and a USA sales office. The division continues to invest 
in its value added services facility in Weymouth which includes a Class 7 clean room giving the Group an industry leading 
capability. 

The  division represents  a  select  number  of  suppliers who manufacture  semiconductors,  related  electronic  and  opto-
electronic components, modules and displays. The division has an in depth understanding of these products and as such 
can offer outstanding levels of commercial and technical support to its customers. 

The products offered are from globally recognised manufacturers and include those for 5G and the Internet of Things 
(IoT),  embedded  processing,  control,  wireless  and  wired  communications,  power  management,  optical  emitters  and 
sensors, displays and LED lighting. The division has expertise in high-reliability components for military and aerospace 
applications. The division’s quality management system is accredited to the international aerospace standard AS9100 
and AS9120.  

The VAD division understands the need to provide the highest level of service to its customers and has a clear focus on 
supporting the electronic and opto-electronic design community. Wherever possible the VAD division offers services for 
customers  who  require  their  programmes  pre-loaded  onto  hardware  or  their  products  prepared  to  go  direct  to  the 
production line. All of these services are carried out in a bespoke electrostatic discharge (ESD) safe facility in line with 
the AS9100 certification. This is an offering many competitors are unable to provide. 

6 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Manufacturing division – Computing, Power and Communications business units 

The division is a market leader in the design, development and supply of portable power and energy storage solutions, 
rugged  and  industrial  computers,  advanced  communication  systems,  including  high-performance  video  transmission 
products and wideband antennas. The facilities and personnel are cleared by the UK Government as necessary to allow 
secure work. It is the technical knowhow, product quality and team responsiveness that sets this business apart from its 
competitors.  

The division has three business units, each operating from a centre of excellence. The Crewkerne facility is the Group’s 
centre of excellence for the design and manufacture of Power products; the Redditch facility focuses primarily on the 
delivery of Computing products; and the facility in Leominster primarily houses the Communications business unit, which 
includes antenna design, production, and test facilities.  

The Group’s  environmental  test chamber  and  vibration  testing  capabilities, in  addition  to  the  near-field  antenna  test 
chamber are located in Leominster, which supports in-house development and is also made available to third parties 
looking  to  utilise  the  state  of  the  art  chamber  on  a  chargeable  basis.  These  facilities  provide  class  leading  test  and 
measurement capabilities which are utilised across the Group. 

Computing business unit 

The Computing business unit designs, manufactures and tests rugged and industrial computing solutions, serving a wide 
range of markets including industrial, military, transportation, surveillance and broadcasting.  

Success has been achieved through specialisation in industrial computer design and integration, custom chassis builds, 
production,  test  and  certification  and  customisation  of  Microsoft  Windows  IoT  and  related  software  products  with 
emphasis  on  driving  the  level  of  value  added  content.  Partnerships  with  industry  leaders  including  Nvidia  and  Intel 
position the business unit to address the growing opportunity in Artificial Intelligence (AI). 

The business unit has strong and long standing commercial relationships directly with key suppliers in Asia and the USA. 
The  capabilities  extend  from  the  provision  of  single  board  computer  modules  to  turnkey  integrated  systems  with 
significant engineering based value added content in the design, production, testing and commissioning.  

Power business unit  

The business unit has over 30 years’ experience supplying batteries and mobile power solutions into some of the world’s 
most demanding environments. Its battery packs are used in a range of sectors including medical, oil and gas, military 
and security, aerospace, environmental and oceanographic, and industrial. 

The products provide portable power and energy storage solutions. This includes battery pack assembly, power control, 
electronic and mechanical design, and testing. The Group is agnostic of cell chemistries, enabling the business unit to be 
the subject matter expert for its customers, selecting the most appropriate chemistry and battery management system 
for the customers’ requirements.  

Working from initial design through qualification and United Nations (UN) testing, production, support and disposal at 
end of life, the business unit is well positioned to respond to an increasing demand for mobile and static power solutions 
where there is a specific requirement for high reliability, harsh environment and, above all else, safe systems.  

The  operation  has  the  latest  ISO  9001-2015  standard  that  is  complemented  by  the  ISO18001  health  and  safety 
accreditation and approval to build equipment intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres under the ATEX 
directive. These are all key considerations for our business to business customers. 

7 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Communications business unit 

This  business  unit  provides  custom  solutions  that  include  bespoke  antenna  design  and  manufacture,  advanced  high 
bandwidth radios including related peripheral technology and domain knowledge from the  in-house product support 
team that has direct end user experience. 

The radios provide situational awareness solutions and are in service primarily with Special Forces users for ground based 
and, increasingly, unmanned platforms both aerial and maritime.  The team seeks opportunities to enhance the base 
line  radio  product  with customised  packaging  for  harsh  environments,  switching  and  routing  hardware  and  software 
add-ons as well as leveraging in house antenna capabilities. 

With over 40 years of experience, the business unit is at the forefront of antenna design and manufacture. It provides 
advanced ultra-wide band systems addressing international customer demand. Its antennas are utilised in a range of 
applications including electronic warfare, meteorological sensors and test and measurement applications.  

The Group’s purpose built 18,000 sq. ft facility in Leominster, Herefordshire, includes environmental and vibration testing 
capabilities  and  a  world  class  near-field  test  chamber  that  sets  the  business  apart  from  competitors  and  allows  the 
business unit to remain as a pre-eminent provider of ultra-wideband/high power antenna solutions. 

Group trading overview 

The Solid State Group has delivered organic growth in revenues and record growth in profitability in spite of the very 
challenging market conditions in 2019/20 which saw a significant destocking in Q1 post the original Brexit date, a cyclical 
downturn  in  VAD  and,  at  the  end  of  the  year,  significant  challenges  as  a  result  of  COVID-19.  The  strategic  progress 
combined with the focus on value added solutions, has resulted in the Group delivering organic revenue growth and 
record profits significantly surpassing last year’s result. 

The completion of the integration of the Pacer business has strengthened the VAD division offering. The enhanced scale, 
capabilities, market reach and penetration places the Group in a position to target growth opportunities which would 
not have been previously attainable. 

The Manufacturing division’s technical centres of excellence have enabled it to service its core sectors of computing, 
power and communications more effectively in 2019/20.  It continues to focus efforts where its expertise and product 
offerings will add real value to customers.  This has resulted in high single digit organic revenue growth which has also 
enabled the division to continue to improve operating returns year on year. 

The Group continues to recognise the value of, and to invest in, its staff with various ongoing professional development 
initiatives. The Group continues to attract exceptionally high calibre staff giving it a significant competitive advantage in 
the market place and making it a more attractive partner to do business with. Furthermore, the Group put in place staff 
welfare programmes to provide both physical health and mental health benefits and resources which are available to all 
employees. 

As  highlighted in  the  principal  risk  and  uncertainties  section  below, business  risks  have  been  considered  and,  where 
practical,  mitigated.  However,  the  macroeconomic  and  geopolitical  risks  and  headwinds  including;  COVID-19,  Brexit 
uncertainty, fall in global oil prices, US/China trading relations and the associated impact on foreign exchange, means it 
is very difficult to predict and therefore mitigate fully. Whilst the Group sells predominately to the UK, its customers do 
sell into the global markets and some have reported challenges on new project awards which makes it very difficult to 
forecast demand. 

As a result of the macro environment the Group has seen long lead times and component shortages arising with limited 
warning  for  certain  critical  components,  in  particular,  battery  cells,  PCBs,  some  embedded  processing  modules, 
semiconductors  and  computer  processors.  The  Group  is  also  seeing  and  managing  fluctuations  in  freight  costs  and 
availability.  The  strength  of  the  balance  sheet  together  with  smart  purchasing  actions  have  enabled  the business  to 
successfully mitigate lead times, shortages and transportation impediments. However, this continues to be a challenge 
requiring active management and necessitates significant buffer stocks being held.  

Diversity is a key strength, providing the Group with resilience. The diversity in technology, markets and territory has 
offered some protection against the global headwinds in the period and enabled Solid State to deliver record results. 
This has carried forward to the current year and strengthened the Group’s ability to weather the COVID-19 storm better 
than some in the industry. Further details updating on the impact of COVID-19 on the business are set out in the outlook 
section of this report. 

8 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Divisional business review 

Value Added Distribution (‘VAD’) division 

2019-20 proved to be a challenging year for the UK electronics distribution and semiconductor industry with the market 
declining circa 7% over the financial year (source ECSN). Despite this, the VAD division significantly outperformed the 
market with like-for-like proforma revenues slightly ahead of the prior year at £39.2m (2019: £38.8m). 

The  key  metrics  of  margin  and  stock  turn  continue  to  be  well  controlled,  with  stock  turns  of  more  than  five  times. 
Divisional  margins  have  benefitted  from  the  first  full  year  contribution  of  the  Pacer  business  which  has  delivered 
particularly pleasing results in the USA where the gross margin has been increased 6%, in part because of the enhanced 
valued added offering. Underlying margins (USA aside) have been maintained at prior year levels despite the downward 
market pressure. 

VAD ended the year delivering double digit organic growth in the open order book at £24.2m (2019: £21.9m), however 
COVID-19 has presented unprecedented challenges during Q4 and entering the new financial year. 

The integration of the Pacer Opto-electronics business into the division was completed ahead of schedule. The operating 
margin  improvement  and  growth  strategy  was  defined  in  this  process  and  is  now  being  executed  to  good  effect. 
Pleasingly the Opto-electronic business unit operating margins improved more than 3% over the prior year driven by a 
combination of operational efficiencies and increased value added sales. 

In addition, the integration has allowed the acceleration of the Group cross selling initiatives. This has enabled the VAD 
division  to  seek  opportunities  requiring  higher  levels  of  technical  integration  that  can  be  fulfilled  though  the 
Manufacturing  division.  Two  major  programmes  are  expected  to  start  in  2020  leveraging  the  full  capabilities  of  the 
Group, bringing new and previously unattainable opportunities to the business. 

The introduction of new software to monitor and manage VAD’s pipeline of projects and design wins has facilitated an 
increasing level of activity across both business units and has allowed for tighter control and better targeting of human 
resource to accelerate these programmes. 

During the year the division continued to invest in its marketing activity promoting the broader product offering of the 
enlarged VAD division, supporting the need for an enlarged design-in pipeline to feed the future sales growth. Post year 
end, COVID-19 has required a re-focus on the ways in which the division promotes, markets, and sells its products. There 
has  been  a  greater  focus  on  on-line  technical  support,  on-line  events  and  webinars  and investment  in  search  engine 
optimisation. It is expected that many of these innovative and significant changes which have delivered tangible benefits 
to both our customers and suppliers will remain in place post COVID-19. 

The  diverse  nature  of  the  business  continues  to  provide  a level  of resilience  against  business disruption  in  any given 
sector as we have seen at the end of the financial year with COVID-19. The increased scale of the division has meant that 
it is now benefiting from its involvement in the UK’s medical manufacturing industry, which historically would not have 
been the case. 

The VAD business continues to invest in staff and capital equipment at its Weymouth value added facility and indeed 
across the Group. New ERP software is being tested to bring greater efficiencies to the wider business. The investment 
in production capability and capacity at Weymouth has been made to facilitate new opportunities from both existing 
and new customers. 

The VAD division’s strategy remains largely unchanged in terms of its growth ambitions and the means to achieve this 
growth. The division continues to execute on its strategy, although some of the tactical elements whilst still in place have 
necessarily slowed during this COVID-19 pandemic. 

9 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Manufacturing division and business unit summaries 

The focus for the Manufacturing division in 2019/20 has been to win premium work, adding value when opportunity has 
allowed;  to  drive  improved  operating  performance,  and  put  in  place  a  foundation  for  future  sustainable  profitable 
growth.  

Pleasingly, in the year to 31 March 2020 it has been able to deliver organic revenue growth of 8.8%, primarily driven 
from  the  Power  business  unit.  This  has  translated  into  record  profit  with  underlying  divisional  operating  margins 
increasing to 15% (2019: 11%). This improvement reflects a strong sales mix in the year combined with the benefits of 
operational gearing. The division also benefitted from the sale of some legacy inventory which was written down, the 
additional margin has been treated as exceptional and is excluded from the underlying operating margins. 

During the year, the division invested in enhancing the business development and sales resource. It also re-focused its 
commercial  effort  on  key  structural  growth  markets  including  medical,  autonomy,  5G,  AI,  and  security  where  its 
expertise, technology and solutions should enable it to deliver value and realise growth. 

In the latter part of the year and as the Group entered the new financial year, the COVID-19 measures have meant the 
deferral of a planned capital investment in an EMC chamber and RF testing suite. This has not caused any significant 
disruption  as  third  party  test  houses  have  continued  to  be  utilised.  Post  the  COVID-19  disruption  this  investment  is 
expected  to  be  made  which  will  further  enhance  the  in-house  capabilities  and  provide  flexibility  and  a  competitive 
advantage allowing the division to differentiate its value offering to customers. 

Pleasingly, the open order book at 31 March 2020 has increased 12% to £15.7m (2019: 14.0m), however approximately 
£2.75m  (2019:   £0.1m)  is  billable  in more  than  one  year  due  to  the  development  cycles,  which  when  combined  with 
lower  order  intake in  Q1  2020/21  as  a  result  of  COVID-19,  means  the  division  expects  near  term  revenue  and  profit 
growth  to  be  challenging.  That  said,  the  Manufacturing  division  has  had  a  good  start  to  the  year  in  spite  of  these 
challenges. 

Computing business unit 

The Computing business unit remains well diversified across market sectors and technologies. It has seen a continued 
increase in the demand for Artificial Internet of Things (AIoT) solutions that are image/video centric, which plays to its 
strengths.  The  business  unit  is  particularly  well  positioned  to  address  the  growing  trend  for  “Edge  Computing”  and 
related harsh environment applications with a range of fanless high powered, long life computing solutions. 

A concerted effort to exploit the Manufacturing division’s engineering skills and security accreditations resulted in an 
important development and production contract from a UK Government organisation for a secure hardware solution for 
an IT environment, which was designed, manufactured and delivered in the period.  

The technology will counter a growing cyber threat that is targeting key workers who are located out of their secure 
environments. As a result, the business has put in place a product road map to develop a standard compact solution 
during the coming year, which is being designed for both sensitive Government departments and broader commercial 
applications where there is a need to operate securely from remote locations. 

Demand  for  image  capture,  processing,  and  transmission  is  growing  significantly,  driven  by  AI  becoming  a  powerful 
solution and the adoption of 5G. In continuing to enhance its offering in this area a product strategy has been put in 
place  to  exploit  the  existing  strengths  and  knowledge  in,  graphic  &  video  processing.  The  business  unit  expertise  in 
designing applied solutions for long term, reliable operation in real world harsh environments provides a competitive 
advantage and an opportunity to command enhanced margins.  

10 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Power business unit 

During 2019/20 the Power business unit has successfully transitioned a number of designs for new markets including 
medical and retail warehousing applications, which were in the development phase in 2019, into production volumes in 
2020. This delivered strong organic revenue growth, with operating margins benefitting from the operational gearing. 

Good progress has been made in designing higher value added solutions while diversifying the markets and customer 
base. The business secured a development and production contract from the same retail technology company for a next 
generation battery solution to utilise state of the art cell chemistry and advanced battery management technology. This 
development will extend into 2020/21 with production deliveries at the end of that period and beyond. 

The short term demand from some of the traditionally strong markets of oil and gas and aerospace have seen significant 
reductions as a result of the combination of macro-economic factors, low oil prices and COVID-19. This validated the 
importance  of  the  strategy  to  diversify  the  market  sectors  which  has  been  implemented  post  the  acquisition  of 
Creasefield in 2016. While this has not eliminated the impact, it has certainly reduced the adverse impact of the down 
turn in these sectors, as we have been able to benefit from stronger demand in other sectors such as retail technology 
and medical. Against the backdrop of this challenging market, billings growth in 2021 is expected to be difficult. 

The focus for future growth remains on high reliability, harsh environment applications where we can add value. New 
applications in robotics solutions and fossil fuel replacement are being targeted in varied market sectors including land 
based, sea and subsea. The business unit is taking care to select markets for portable power and energy storage solutions 
that have not been commoditised. 

Communications business unit 

The  Communications  business  unit  encompasses  antenna products  and  advanced  radio  products  and  is  split  into  the 
Antennas  team  and  the  Radio  team.  The  business  unit’s  technology  is  world  class  with  two  thirds  of  sales  from  the 
Leominster facility being exported worldwide.  

The teams have worked diligently to resolve and purge the final legacy contracts and sell related inventories which were 
fully provided, while maintaining our reputation and customer relationships. 

The Antennas strategic plan, which has been implemented, is to focus on the design and development of smaller and 
lower risk antenna solutions that can be combined into larger arrays to provide overall performance. This strategy has 
begun to show results and whilst sales were relatively flat year on year, the improved quality of the orders and reduction 
of risk resulted in strong margin contribution. 

The Radio products are heavily project based, the securing of two high value orders from the UK Government enabled 
the team to meet bookings, billings and margin expectations for the year and helped them to carry a solid open order 
book into the current year. 

The Radio team has targeted adding value to the offering through selling engineering and training services as an adjunct 
to the hardware equipment sales, further enhancing the value proposition. In addition, we have started to have some 
success in securing additional technology partners to complement the world class meshed radio system. A partnership 
with a software provider who delivers support on the routing and switching of data over the radio networks has been 
established.  This has increased the order values and value add the team can provide as part of the solution. 

The  strategic  priority  has  been  to  focus  the  Radio  team  on  domestic  markets  in  preference  to  overseas  defence 
programmes which reduces the inherent risk and uncertainty on timing, currency, and difficult commercial constraints. 
This notwithstanding, a network of overseas partners is being established, simplifying the business model, and providing 
customers with in-territory support to fulfil these overseas requirements.  This initiative is proving successful. 

This commercial focus has developed a better quality order book that is more deliverable, building a platform for the 
year beyond. We have seen stronger bookings in Q4 and into Q1 which provides an order book that sets this business 
unit up well for FY 2020/2021. 

11 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Principal risks and uncertainties 

The Group has a process for the identification and management of risk as part of the governance structure operated by 
the  Board.  Management  of  risk  is  the  responsibility  of  the  Board  of  Directors.  In  managing  and  mitigating  risk,  a 
comprehensive and robust system of controls and risk management processes has been developed and implemented by 
the Board. 

The Board’s role in risk management includes: 

• 
• 
• 
• 
• 
• 

promoting a culture that emphasises integrity at all levels in the business; 
embedding risk management within the core processes of the business; 
setting the appetite for risk; 
determining the principal risks; 
ensuring that these are communicated effectively to the businesses; and, 
setting the overall policies for risk management and control. 

The  principal  risks  affecting  the  Group  are  identified  by  the  Group  Executive  team  within  their  functional  areas  of 
responsibility and are reviewed by the Board. 

In identifying the business risks below, we analyse risks across four key areas: 

• 
• 
• 
• 

strategic risk; 
operational risk; 
commercial risk; and, 
financial risk. 

Principal risks and uncertainties 
Acquisition risk – (Strategic risk) 
Business risk 
• 
• 
• 
• 

Loss of key customers. 
Loss of key employees. 
Loss of key suppliers. 
Erosion of Intellectual 
property base. 
Failure to identify and 
complete profitable 
acquisitions. 
Failure to integrate 
management reporting 
structures and control 
disciplines. 

• 

• 

Year on year 
change in 
likelihood: 

Down 

Potential 
impact: 

Low 

Effect: 

Integration of 
acquired 
business is not 
effective 

Mitigation and Strategy 
•  Rigorous due diligence to ensure that acquisitions can be 

effectively integrated, and all the relevant stakeholders 
are engaged, supportive and aligned. 
Pro-active and early engagement with: 
o 
key customers and suppliers; and, 
o  employees through the on-site presence of Solid 

State PLC management. 

Preparation and execution of a cross functional 
integration plan. 

• 

• 

•  Continued investment in development of technology in 

the acquired businesses. 
o 

Integration into existing internal control 
frameworks, processes and reporting systems. 

At the end of the financial year the Group’s acquisition 
strategy has been suspended temporarily during this period 
of uncertainty as a result of the COVID-19 Pandemic.  
Communication continues with prospective acquisitions 
however progress will be limited in the short-term, until the 
COVID-19 restrictions are removed.  

12 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Principal risks and uncertainties 
Legislative environment and compliance – (Strategic risk) 
Business risk 
•  Restrictions on business 

Mitigation and Strategy 
• 

because of regulatory lock 
down due to a pandemic. 
•  On-going Brexit negotiations 
and USA / China trade 
dispute causing an increased 
level of uncertainty in the 
legislative and trading 
environment in which we 
operate 

•  Overseas competitors are 
favoured in their domestic 
markets 
Failure to comply with 
applicable legislation, to 
include but not limited to: 
o  Export Control and 

• 

International Traffic in 
Arms (ITAR); 
o  Bribery Act; 
o  General Data protection 
regulation (GDPR); and, 
o  Employment legislation 

and company 
legislation. 

Year on year 
change in 
likelihood: 

Up 

Potential 
impact: 

High 

Effect: 

Trading may be 
disrupted / 
restricted, 
reduced sales 
volumes and 
profitability 

• 

Solid State PLC has  continued to trade while being 
compliant with the government’s COVID-19 restrictions. 
The business operates across four key operational sites, 
these are independent of each other, and have remained 
operational by adhering to best practice guidelines on 
social distancing and hygiene protocols. In terms of risk 
mitigation, all measures are in place to ensure that the 
risk of cross-contamination within the business is 
minimised.  Furthermore, where possible the Group 
invested in technology and equipment to ensure that 
staff who can work from home are working from home.  
The on-going Brexit negotiations present a level of risk 
and uncertainty to the business environment in which 
we operate, however given our level of trade with the EU 
is modest our exposure is lower than some other 
companies. However, our breadth of technical 
knowledge, service levels from our specialist sales teams, 
scale of our operations, structure, strong balance sheet, 
governance, and quality standards mean the Board 
believes the Group is well positioned to respond quickly. 
The Board believes that the Group’s diversified structure 
gives it resilience, and places it in a far stronger position 
than our smaller unlisted competitors within our 
customers’ supply chains. 

•  Regular reporting of export / ITAR compliance, and 
detailed internal control processes and procedures. 
•  Continuing education of our employees on the legislative 

developments and requirements. 
Internal reviews and external audits. 

• 
•  Adopt suitable software systems where appropriate to 
aid export control procedures and assist with other 
compliance issues. 
The individual operating companies maintain operating 
procedures and are certified to internationally 
recognised standards, e.g. ISO 9001-2015, AS9100, 
AS9120, SC21. 

• 

13 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Year on year 
change in 
likelihood: 

Up 

Potential 
impact: 

High 

Effect: 

Trading may be 
disrupted / 
restricted, 
reduced sales 
volumes and 
profitability 

Year on year 
change in 
likelihood: 

Up 

Potential 
impact: 

Medium 

Effect: 

Quality and or 
service level 
issues rise, and 
costs increased 

CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Principal risks and uncertainties 
Natural disasters – (Operational risk) 
Business risk 
•  Natural disaster or medical 
epidemic / pandemic 
disrupts production 
capability, supply of 
materials or customer 
demand. 

Mitigation and Strategy 
•  At the end of the financial year the COVID-19 pandemic 
effected the world, resulting in restrictions on travel and 
social and business activities. As reported in this annual 
report the Group implemented changes to working 
practices to enable the business to continue to meet its 
customer demand while ensuring that the government 
guidance on social distancing in conjunction with 
appropriate hygiene practices were fully embraced to 
ensure that the risk of cross-contamination within the 
business is minimised. Furthermore, as noted above 
home working has been adopted wherever possible.  
The Group has a documented and tested disaster 
recovery plan for each site. In addition, the Group has 
business interruption insurance, which subject to the 
terms of the cover purchased provide some insurance 
mitigation. 

• 

Retention of key employees – (Operational risk) 
Business risk 
• 

Loss of key people and 
critical skills. 
Insufficient skilled 
employees. 
Poor engagement and 
morale. 

• 

• 

Mitigation and Strategy 
•  COVID-19 has meant that during Q4 and post year end 

we have seen some customers and market sectors facing 
significant challenges resulting in what is expected will 
be short term reduced demand. As a result, the Group 
has utilised the Government Furlough scheme to help 
ensure we are able to retain our skilled work force for 
when demand recovers. 

•  Retention and development of our workforce is critical to 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

the long term success of the Group. 
Low staff turnover, with many employees having been 
with the Group for in excess of ten years. 
The Group encourages and invests in continuous 
professional development and training in core skills and 
competencies as appropriate. 
The Group pro-actively looks to develop its own talent 
and makes use of the government apprenticeship 
schemes. 
The Group pro-actively communicates with its 
employees. 
The Group reviews & benchmarks employee rewards to 
ensure we are fairly rewarding our employees. 

14 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Principal risks and uncertainties 
Failure of or malicious damage to IT systems – (Operational risk) 
Business risk 
• 

Mitigation and Strategy 
•  During 2019 both divisions have been working on 

The inability to access 
business critical data. 
The inability to efficiently run 
the operating companies. 

• 

• 

upgrading the IT systems to the latest versions, due to 
COVID-19 these activities are continuing but with a 
delayed timetable.  
The existing systems are reliable and functional however 
the upgrades will offer improved functionality in due 
course which will support the development of the 
business. 

The Group: 
•  Has been certified as meeting the “Cyber Essentials” 

standards. 

•  Runs automated daily back-ups of all business critical 

data. 

•  Operates off site storage of business critical data. 
•  Has established, documented and tested disaster 

recovery plans. 

Supply chain interruption – (Operational risk) 
Business risk 
•  Dependency on significant 

Mitigation and Strategy 
•  Active programme to maintain cross qualified second 

suppliers or dependency on a 
qualified supplier within a 
controlled supply chain. 

sources of supply. 

•  Rigorous supplier quality management processes. 
•  Maintain close relationships with key suppliers in order 

to be aware of potential supply issues. 

•  Appropriate levels of buffer stock holding to minimise 

• 

the effects of extended lead times. 
The global COVID-19 restrictions have resulted in supply 
challenges, however, the mitigation and strategy has 
meant that through Q4 we have been able to manage 
the disruption and extended lead times with limited 
impact during the financial year to 31 March 2020. 

Competition risk – (Commercial risk) 
Business risk 
• 

Mitigation and Strategy 
• 

Loss of distribution supplier 
franchise agreement would 
result in significant loss of 
product lines and customers. 
Loss of a major contract / 
customer or business to a 
competitor. 
Price / margin erosion due to 
predatory pricing from a 
competitor. 

• 

• 

Setting a commercial strategy to gain share by:  
o  Focusing on quality, value and customer service; 
o  Develop and maintain close relationships with 

suppliers and customers to become the “partner of 
choice”, by forming multi-level partnerships; 
o  As a trusted partner providing product solutions 
from design, to pilot & volume production; and, 

o  Winning additional business from existing 

customers and capturing new customers and 
revenue streams. 

•  Continue to invest in product development to ensure 

competitive advantage. 

•  Continued investment in the recruitment of high quality 

personnel. 

15 

Year on year 
change in 
likelihood: 

no change 

Potential 
impact: 

Medium 

Effect: 

Costs, sales, 
profitability and 
reputational 
damage 

Year on year 
change in 
likelihood: 

no change 

Potential 
impact: 

Medium 

Effect: 

Quality issues, 
costs, sales 
volumes and 
profitability 

Year on year 
change in 
likelihood: 

no change 

Potential 
impact: 

Low 

Effect: 

Loss of market 
share, reduced 
sales volumes 
and profitability 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Year on year 
change in 
likelihood: 

No change 

Potential 
impact: 

Medium 

Effect: 

Sales volumes 
and profitability 

Year on year 
change in 
likelihood: 

Up 

Potential 
impact: 

High 

Effect: 

Going concern / 
Financial loss 
and 
reputational 
damage 

CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Principal risks and uncertainties 
Product / Technology change – (Commercial risk) 
Business risk 
• 

Failure to maintain our 
leading technical capabilities 
and knowledge which allows 
us to develop electronic 
solutions in partnership with 
our customers. 
Failure to manufacture 
solutions that meet the 
agreed specification. 
Failure of key distribution 
franchises to innovate and 
introduce new products. 

Mitigation and Strategy 
•  Continued investment in the technical training and 

• 

development of our sales, engineering and operations 
staff, building our capabilities. 
Investment in joint R&D programmes with partners to 
ensure we are at the forefront of technical electronic 
solutions. 

•  Maintain rigorous quality and engineering control 

processes to ensure that our products meet the required 
specifications. 
Perform all necessary detailed product testing to ensure 
that products are fit for purpose. 

• 

•  Continuously seek new franchises and partners at the 

forefront of electronics technology. 

Forecasting and financial liquidity – (Financial risk) 
Business risk 
• 

Mitigation and Strategy 
• 

• 

• 

• 

The business does not 
maintain sufficient funding 
and liquidity to meet its 
obligations as they fall due. 
The business commits to a 
materially significant loss 
making contract. 

• 

The Group prepares financial forecasts to evaluate the 
level of funding required for the foreseeable future. 
These forecasts are reviewed and approved by the 
Board. 
In the light of the COVID-19 disruption extensive 
disclosure has been provided in respect of going concern 
and longer term viability (see page 39, 40 and 76) 
•  Based on these forecasts appropriate funding and 
liquidity solutions are put in place to ensure that 
adequate headroom is maintained. 

•  At the year-end 31 March 2020, the Group had an 

• 

undrawn revolving credit facility of £7.5m and the Group 
had net cash of £3.2m (2019: £2.0m net debt). 
The Group operates a clearly defined delegation of 
authority matrix and contract review / contract risk 
register. 

16 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Financial Review 

In order to provide a fuller understanding of the Group’s ongoing underlying performance, a number of adjusted profit 
measures as supplementary information are included, on a consistent basis with that reported by the financial analysts 
that review our business. As detailed in note 32, the adjusted measures eliminate the impact of certain non-cash charges 
and non-recurring items. 

Revenues 

Group revenues from continuing operations of £67.4m were up 20% on the prior year (2019: £56.3m) as a result of a 
combination of organic growth and the full year benefit of Pacer. Proforma like-for-like revenues were up £2.7m or ~4.2% 
from 2019 proforma at £64.5m, which is adjusted for the full year benefit of Pacer and excluding £1m of non-recurring 
VAD revenue reported in the prior year. 

As reported above, the UK electronics distribution and semiconductor industry faced a declining market of circa 7% over 
the financial year period (source ECSN). Despite this the VAD division significantly outperformed the market and as a 
whole performed well delivering 1% organic growth with like-for-like proforma revenues slightly ahead of the prior year 
at £39.2m (2019: £38.8m). 

The  Manufacturing  division  reported  revenue  of  £28.2m  (2019:  £25.9m)  which  reflects  8.8%  organic  growth  while 
continuing  to  improve  margins.  The  current  year’s  strong  performance  reflects  the  successful  scaling  of  output  and 
delivery of production volumes of the prior year development projects, which when combined with the benefit of the 
operational gearing and strong sales mix has delivered a record profit before tax.  

Gross profit 

Underlying gross profit for the year is up £4.2m to £20.6m (2019: £16.4m), reflecting margins increasing to 30.6% (2019: 
29.1%) driven by margin improvement in both divisions. Reported margins of £20.8m include the benefit of the sale of 
some legacy fully written down manufacturing inventories which has been stripped out as exceptional. 

VAD margins have improved by 1.3% to 24.8% (2019: 23.5%) largely due to the full year benefit of the value added work 
within the Opto-electronics business unit acquired in the prior year. When combined with the significant improvement 
in the underlying Manufacturing margins to 38.7% (2019: 35.6%), Group underlying margins improved 1.5% in spite of 
the potentially dilutive impact of the increased VAD in the mix of business. 

VAD contributed gross margin of £9.7m (2019: £7.2m), up 36% over the prior year, largely due to the full year impact of 
the  acquisition  of  Pacer,  circa  £1.9m,  with  the  remaining  £0.6m  delivered  organically.  The  Manufacturing  division 
contributed  £10.9m  (2019:  £9.2m)  of  underlying  gross  margin  which  is  up  18%  organically  on  the  prior  year.  The 
underlying  gross  margin  percentage  has  increased  to  38.7%  (2019:  35.6%) primarily  benefitting  from  the  operational 
gearing and a favourable mix of sales with higher sales of high value added product being achieved.  

Sales and general administration expenses 

Sales  and  general  administration  (SG&A)  expenses  of  £16.7m  (2019:  £13.5m)  increased  by  £3.2m.  The  increase  is 
primarily due to the full year impact of the Pacer operating costs of circa £2.2m acquired in the prior year, additional 
investment  in  employee  related  costs  of  circa  £1.0m,  overhead  inflation  of  circa  £0.2m,  increased  depreciation  & 
amortisation  (D&A)  and  share  based  payment  charges  of  £0.7m  and  £0.1m  respectively.  These  increases  have  been 
partly  offset  by  integration  efficiencies  and  cost  savings  of  circa  £1.0m.  Adjusted  SG&A  expenses  from  continuing 
operations increased by £3.1m to £15.8m (2019: £12.7m).  

The VAD divisions expenses reflect the full year impact of the acquisition of the Pacer overheads which has resulted in 
the division’s adjusted SG&A expenses increasing from £5.5m to £7.5m. The Manufacturing division’s adjusted SG&A 
expenses have increased to £6.6m from £6.3m reflecting primarily investment in staff costs and inflation. Adjusted head 
office SG&A expenses have increased to £1.7m (2019: £0.9m) primarily owing to an increase in corporate overheads and 
staff costs. 

17 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Sales and general administration expenses – cont’ 

Within SG&A expenses the reported depreciation and amortisation (D&A) from continuing operations in the year was 
£2.1m (2019: £1.4m) which is up £0.7m primarily due to the adoption of IFRS16 (which resulted in £0.5m of rent being 
reclassified as depreciation), the full year impact on D&A arising from the Pacer  acquisition, increased amortisation of 
capitalised  R&D.  Adjusted D&A  from continuing  operations  (excludes  the  amortisation  of  acquisition  intangibles)  has 
increased to £1.6m (2019: £1.2m). 

Operating profit  

Adjusted operating margins increased to 7.2% (2019: 6.5%) with adjusted operating profit from continuing operations 
up 33% to £4.9m (2019: £3.7m) reflecting the growth in revenue and the improved margins. Reported operating profit 
was up 42% to £4.1m (2019: £2.9m). The adjustments to operating profit are set out in further detail in note 32. 

We  have  recognised  £0.02m  (2019:  nil)  within  operating  profit in  respect  of  Research  and Development Expenditure 
Credit (RDEC) in addition to the tax credits recognised within the tax line, where we are eligible for the SME R&D tax 
scheme. These development programmes are a cornerstone of the Group’s future high value add revenue streams. 

Profit before tax 

Adjusted profit before tax was up 34% to £4.7m (2019: £3.5m). Reported profit before tax was up 42% to £4.0m (2019: 
£2.8m).  This  is  reported  after  a  share  based  payments  charge  of  £0.4m  (2019:  £0.3m),  amortisation  of  acquisition 
intangibles of £0.5m (2019: £0.3m) and exceptional items of £0.2m credit (2019: £0.1m cost). 

Profit after tax 

The Group benefit from the R&D tax credit scheme which reduces the effective tax rate for the year to 15% (2019: 12%) 
from the standard rate of 19%. As the profitability grows the benefit of R&D tax credits diminishes. Adjusted profit after 
tax was up 29% to £4.0m (2019: £3.1m). Reported profit after tax was up 28% to £3.4m (2019: £2.7m). 

EPS 

Adjusted fully diluted earnings per share from continuing operations  for the year ended 31 March 2020 is up 29% at 
46.3p  (2019:  35.9p).  Reported  fully  diluted  earnings  per  share from continuing  operations  is  up  29%  at  39.5p (2019: 
30.7p). 

Cash flow from operations 

Cash inflow from continuing operations for the year of £8.0m is up from £4.9m in 2019 primarily due to improved cash 
profits combined with a £1.4m working capital inflow. Underlying cash flow from operations was up £4.0m at £8.0m 
(2019:  £4.0m)  after  excluding  the  net  cash  benefit  from  advanced  customer  payments.  This  delivers  an  underlying 
operating cash conversion percentage of 165% (2019: 109%) and a reported operating cash conversion percentage of 
197% (2019: 168%). 

There  was  a  working  capital cash  inflow in  the period  of  £1.4m  due  to  increased  payables  of  £1.8m  offset  in  part  by 
increased receivables £0.4m. Inventories have remained at a higher level due to increased lead times on battery  cells 
and various electronic components and the positioning of inventory to mitigate the potential supply chain disruption 
arising due to the COVID-19 pandemic. 

Investing activities  

During the year, the Group invested £0.6m (2019: £0.6m) in property plant and equipment, and £0.3m (2019: £0.3m) in 
software and research and development intangibles.  

The  capital  expenditure  reflects  significant  investment  in  IT  hardware  across  the  Group  of  £0.2m  and  continued 
investment in the new Opto-electronics business unit facilities in Pangbourne and Weymouth amounting to circa £0.1m. 
This aside, the investment has been maintained at the historical run rate level for capital expenditure.  

18 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Financing activities 

The Group has entered or extended leases during the year which has resulted in the recognition of £0.3m of additional 
right of use assets with a corresponding right of use liability, in accordance with IFRS16. Cash payments were made in 
the period in respect of lease liabilities of £0.5m. 

The financing activities reflect the accelerated repayment of the £6.0m of acquisition facilities put in place to fund the 
acquisition of Pacer. The Group repaid all bar the last £0.3m which was repaid post year end in May 2020. Solid State 
continues to have a strong relationship with Lloyds Bank and, having repaid the term loan early, Lloyds has extended the 
quantum and  term of  revolving credit facility to £7.5m (2019: £3.5m) which is now committed until the 30 November 
2021. The facility is currently undrawn.  

Pleasingly, as a result of the strong cash generation the Group has reported a year end net cash position of £3.2m (2019: 
net debt £2.0m) which in conjunction with the unutilised bank facilities provides significant funding headroom for 2021 
and beyond. 

Statement of financial position 

During  the  year,  the Group  has  continued  to  see  its  balance  sheet  position  strengthen.  The Group’s  net  assets  have 
increased to £22.5m (2019: £19.9m) reflecting the retained profits in the year. Furthermore, the Group has returned to 
a  net cash  position  with  £3.2m  at  the  year end (2019:  £2.0m  net  debt). The  adoption  of  IFRS  16  has resulted in the 
recognition of £1.1m of right of use lease assets and an offsetting right of use lease liability. The impact on net assets is 
immaterial at both transition and as at 31 March 2020. 

Dividend 

The Board is proposing to maintain last year’s dividend meaning a final dividend of 7.25p (2019: 8.3p), giving a full year 
dividend of 12.5p (2019: 12.5p). Subject to approval of the final dividend by shareholders at the AGM on 9 September 
2020, the final dividend will be paid on 23 September 2020 to shareholders on the register at the close of business on 
the 4 September 2020.  The shares will be marked ex-dividend on 3 September 2020. 

KPIs 

In addition to the KPI information provided in the Chairman’s Report and this Strategic Report, the Directors use several 
key performance indicators to manage the business, disclosed in the financial review on pages 17 to 19. Non-financial 
KPIs are not disclosed other than in the environmental CO2e reporting on page 24. 

19 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

COVID-19 update and Outlook 

Post the year end, the direct impact on sales of COVID-19 has been modest with a very low number of customers closing 
and a minimal impact on the open order book. The business reacted early to the pandemic with all staff who could work 
from  home  being  equipped  to,  and  management  having  tested  their  capability  to  work  from  home  well  before  the 
government imposed lock down. The business has not lost a single day’s trading as a result of the pandemic. 

Several staff volunteered to cross train to ensure warehouse operations and production operations can continue without 
significant  disruption.  The  Group  operates  across  four  independent  manufacturing  sites  in  the  UK.  These  sites  have 
remained open and operating effectively with minimal disruption while adhering to best practice guidelines on social 
distancing and hygiene protocols. Measures have been put in place to ensure that the risk of cross-contamination within 
the business is minimised. 

As the lock down eases, where possible staff are continuing to work from home, however the Group has implemented 
the plans for a gradual phased return to the offices. The key objective is to maintain a safe working environment with a 
view to minimising the risk to staff. 

Commercially  COVID-19  is  affecting  the  business  in  contrasting  ways:  The  Group  has  been  notified  by  numerous 
customers in both its Manufacturing and VAD divisions that the Group has been designated a critical supplier under the 
government’s critical industries and key workers guidance. Sectors highlighting this dependency include medical, food 
retail, security, transportation, and defence. 

Conversely, the Group is experiencing softness in the demand for batteries for the commercial aerospace market and in 
computing products for certain niche applications in the industrial sector. Separately, owing to the fall in oil prices, we 
are currently experiencing lower levels of orders for battery packs from the oil and gas industry. 

The Group continues to hold relatively high levels of stock to limit exposure to supply chain volatility. At present, the 
Group holds approximately 2.5 months’ stock. 

The  Board  is  taking  prudent  steps  to  mitigate  and  manage  its  cashflow  and  cost  base  to  withstand  this  near-term 
uncertainty. These included a recruitment freeze; a salary increase freeze for all Directors and staff; adoption of available 
deferrals  for  VAT  and  PAYE payments  to  HMRC;  and  furloughing  of  some  staff under  the  Coronavirus  Job  Retention 
Scheme.  

Furthermore, the Board has suspended the Group’s acquisition strategy temporarily during this period of uncertainty, 
and delaying new planned capital expenditure,  for example in new EMC test equipment for manufacturing. However, 
ongoing  projects  around  ERP  system  upgrades  and  the  acquisition  of  an  advanced  welder  to  support  new  battery 
developments have gone ahead. 

While  the  Group’s  acquisition  strategy  has  been  paused,  the  Group  remains  acquisitive  and  is  at  the  early  stage  of 
investigating several opportunities. It will look to be opportunistic should an acquisition target arise as we exit the COVID-
19 pandemic. 

The continued margin improvement and organic growth achieved by the Manufacturing division, in conjunction with a 
technology  development  across  all of  the  key  sectors  of  computing, power and  communications  puts  the Group in  a 
strong position, albeit the macroeconomic headwinds in 2020/21 continue to be a challenge. The Manufacturing division 
is in a strong competitive position to deliver profitable growth in the mid-term once we get past the COVID-19 disruption. 

Following the acquisition and integration of the Pacer Group of companies, the enlarged VAD division has the scale, reach 
and capabilities to attract further significant franchises such as Microchip which we signed during the year. We have 
invested significantly in our value added services facility in Weymouth, which differentiates our VAD portfolio to provide 
us with exciting opportunities for the future. 

Whilst  the  order  intake  in  Q1  has  been  just  under  15%  lower  than  the  prior  year  we  have  a  number  of  significant 
opportunities which we are currently bidding on which could provide upside to the fortunes for the full year, albeit Q2 
and the early part of Q3 are expected to be challenging.  

Over the next two years of Solid State’s five year plan, the Group will remain focused on securing quality orders as  it 
strives to achieve the goal set to double the size of the business through a combination of organic growth and strategic 
acquisitions.  The  Board  is  confident  that  the  achievements  of  the  last  year  and  the  growth  in  the  open  order  book 
demonstrate that Solid State is making good progress towards achieving its goals and that the prospects for the Group 
remain very positive in spite of the disruption that COVID-19 is causing.  

20 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Cautionary statement 

This report contains forward-looking statements that are based on current expectations or beliefs, as well as assumptions 
about  future  events. These forward-looking  statements  can  be  identified  by  the fact  that  they  do not  relate  only  to 
historical or current facts.  

Forward-looking statements often use words such as anticipate, target, expect, estimate, intend, plan, goal, believe, will, 
may, should, would, could, is confident, or other words of similar meaning.  

Undue reliance should not be placed on any such statements because they speak only as at the date of this document 
and, by their very nature, they are subject to known and unknown risks and uncertainties and can be affected by other 
factors  that  could  cause  actual  results,  and  Solid  State  PLC’s  plans  and  objectives,  to  differ  materially  from  those 
expressed or implied in the forward-looking statements. 

There are a number of factors which could cause actual results to differ materially from those expressed or implied in 
forward-looking statements. These risks and uncertainties include, among other factors, changing economic, financial, 
political, business or other market conditions.  

Solid State PLC is under no obligation to revise or update any forward looking statement contained within these financial 
statements,  regardless  of  whether  those  statements  are  affected  as  a  result  of  new  information,  future  events  or 
otherwise, save as required by law and regulations.  

The strategic report on pages 6 to 21 has been approved by the Board of Directors and signed on its behalf by: 

G S Marsh 
Chief Executive Officer 

30 June 2020 

21 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE AND SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY REPORT 

Code of business conduct, ethics and anti-corruption 

Our business conduct policy sets out the values and standards of behaviour expected from all employees. In addition, it 
addresses expectations relating to the day-to-day conduct of business partners and agents who act as representatives 
of Solid State PLC.  

The policy also deals with how employees, business partners and agents can report any concerns that may arise.  

The policy actively promotes corporate social responsibility across our Group. It addresses how we work with a wide 
range of third party organisations in areas such as ethical employment policies, educational and community work. 

It sets out the responsibilities of employees in ensuring that they carry out their business activities in a manner aligned 
with the Group’s values and business principles.  

All  staff  are required  to  ensure  that  they  comply  with  all  relevant laws  and regulations  of  the countries  in  which  we 
operate and do business. The policies also set out behaviours that are unacceptable and which could bring Solid State 
PLC’s reputation into disrepute. 

The policy contains guidance on avoiding conflicts of interest, confidentiality, adherence to export controls, our approach 
to gifts and hospitality, bribery and corruption and managing relationships with third parties. 

Upholding the policy is the responsibility of all Solid State PLC employees and business partners. We actively encourage 
everyone to report any behaviour which may be in breach of the Code, is unethical or illegal. This is achieved by fostering 
a culture of openness and accountability, and by providing a clear procedure that enables any individual to raise breaches 
of policy or malpractice directly at the highest level. 

All those working for, or on behalf of, Solid State PLC are required to confirm that they have read and understood the 
business conduct policy, and a copy of the policy is readily available to all employees. 

Commercial business practices 

We are committed to acting professionally, fairly and with integrity in all our business dealings and relationships. We 
work with our partners to adopt best business practices, which include: 

In our dealings with customers 

Working closely in partnership with customers and potential customers to help us improve the value we can add to them 
through our products and services; 

Being open and honest about our products and services, communicating with customers all appropriate information they 
need to ensure we consistently meet their expectations; 

Ensuring that any issues or problems are dealt with efficiently, with fairness and in a timely manner; 

Ensuring  that  we  seek  feedback  to  benchmark  and  evaluate  what  we  do  in  order  to  help  us  deliver  continuous 
improvement in our products and services to maintain our value. 

In our dealings with suppliers 

Working with our suppliers to help us improve the value of the products and services we offer to customers with the 
benefit of the access to the supply chain that we have; Identifying and selecting suppliers to work in partnership with 
using fair and reasonable methodologies; 

Identifying and working with suppliers who operate to ethical business standards; 

Working  closely  with  suppliers  to help  us improve  the  value  of  the products  and  services we  offer customers  to  the 
benefit of the supply chain. 

In our relationships with employees and other stakeholders 

Ensuring employment practices throughout the Group are fair and in full compliance with employment legislation; 

Encouraging volunteer work in community activities; 

Supporting  local  academic  establishments  and  participating  in  voluntary  business  advisory  services  via  professional 
bodies. 

22 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE AND SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY REPORT 
 (continued) 

How we invest in our people 

Our success depends on our people. The Group recognises the important role our employees play, and  that effective 
teamwork is critical for us to achieve our corporate goals. 

We strive to make the Solid State Group a “great place to work” where our actions  demonstrate this with behaviours 
that  the  team  deliver each  and  every  day. This  is  aimed  at  providing  an  environment  of  teamwork  and  collaborative 
respect, where we are all valued for our contribution and everyone is proud to be part of “the Solid State team”. 

We maintain equality of opportunity in all employment practices, policies, and procedures regardless of race, nationality, 
gender, age, marital status, sexual orientation, disability and religious or political beliefs. As part of our policies we set 
out our approach to diversity. 

Human rights 

Solid State PLC is committed to respecting the human rights of all those working with or for us. We do not accept any 
form of child or forced labour and we will not do business with anyone who fails to uphold these standards.  

Modern slavery 

The Modern Slavery Act addresses the role of businesses in preventing modern slavery within their organisation and in 
their supply chains. The Group has a zero-tolerance approach to modern slavery and is committed to acting ethically and 
with integrity in all of its business dealings and relationships and to implementing and enforcing effective systems  and 
controls to ensure modern slavery is not taking place anywhere in its business or in any of its supply chains. The Group 
has developed and implemented policies to comply with the requirements of the UK’s Modern Slavery Act. Reference to 
the policy may be found on the corporate website at www.solidstateplc.com. 

Health and Safety 

Solid State PLC places health and safety at the core of all the business activities to ensure a safe working environment 
for everyone  involved in  the  business.  As  a corner  stone  of  our  business  operations  Health  and  Safety reporting is  a 
standing item on the Board agenda. 

All employees are encouraged to take an active role in ensuring that our working environment is a safe place to work 
and visit by actively reporting all safety observations and incidents, being involved in safety audits, risk assessments and 
regular awareness training sessions. 

The operations teams are actively involved in electronics industry-wide initiatives, working with industry associations 
and proactively registering under new regulatory directives such as Registration, Evaluation, Authorisation & restriction 
of Chemicals (REACH) and Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment recycling (WEEE). 

Bribery Act 

We implement and enforce effective systems to uphold our zero tolerance approach to bribery and corruption. To ensure 
we only work with third parties whose standards are consistent with our own, all agents and third parties who act on 
behalf of the Group are obliged by written agreement to comply with the standards set out in the Code. 

Confidentiality 

Our business conduct policy emphasises the need for confidentiality to be maintained in all our business activities.  

Maintaining confidentiality is a critical part of our culture. Our policy and practices help to ensure that all staff understand 
what constitutes confidential information and restricts internal access based on a “need to know basis”. 

Information relating to third parties is not disclosed without the third parties’ written consent. Where we conduct work 
for  customers  including  government  agencies  where  specific  confidentiality  requirements  exist  such  as  the  official 
secrets act we have process and procedures to ensure we comply with these requirements. 

23 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE AND SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY REPORT 
 (continued) 

Environmental 

The Group’s activities can be summarised as largely distribution, manufacturing/assembly operations, combined with 
office based research, product development and other commercial functions, where we essentially receive materials and 
products from suppliers, assemble them into a new product and dispatch them to customers. 

The primary impact on the environment, which is entirely within the Group’s control, is the consumption of the normal 
business energy sources such as heating and power, which the Group aims to minimise through compliance with relevant 
environmental legislation. However, the largest factor impacting energy consumption in our facilities is the weather. In 
a year with moderate summer / winter weather our energy consumption is low, however if we face extreme hot / cold 
weather the energy consumption increases significantly. 

The Group do not operate its own delivery fleet, the Group use third-party carriers to deliver their products to customers. 
Therefore, the Group’s ability to control the environmental impact of its logistics partners is limited. However, the Group 
has  a  fleet  of  company owned cars  which  have  been  included in  the Group’s  environmental  impact  assessment. The 
Group is actively moving the company owned cars to be low CO2, Hybrid or Electric vehicles as they are replaced  

Waste management is a critical part of conducting our business. We comply with all the relevant waste legislation with 
the key areas of legislation being The Waste Batteries and Accumulators Regulations 2009 and  the Waste Electrical and 
Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive in conjunction with RoHS.  

Where  appropriate  the  Group  actively  works  with  its  customers  which  is  seen  as  tangible  value  to  ensure  that  all 
hazardous  waste  is  properly  managed.  In  complying  with  the  waste  legislation,  the  Group  ensures  that  all  waste  is 
disposed of properly and waste is recycled where it is practicable to do so.  

Local  management  teams  are  committed  to  good  environmental  management  practices  and  are  responsible  for 
implementing the necessary initiatives to meet their local obligations.  Facilities participate in recycling paper, plastic, 
cardboard. The business continues to focus on minimising energy consumption through the efficient use of heating and 
lighting.  

As a company quoted on AIM the Group is required to report its CO2e, the Board believes there are direct benefits to 
our organisation in the measuring and reporting of environmental performance, which should assist the Group to reduce 
its energy consumption and therefore resource costs, as well as gaining a better understanding of the Group’s exposure 
to the risks of climate change.  

Therefore, the following data has been compiled to establish the  Group’s baseline CO2 consumption for the financial 
year 2019–20. Where possible the Group has reported its figures using billed data, which relates to its premises and 
activities.  

Data  has  been  collected  for  the  following  CO2  emission  sources:  electricity  consumption;  gas  consumption;  water 
consumption; company owned vehicles and waste processing. 

In collating this data, we have utilised the 2019 conversion factors to obtain figure for the CO2 consumption of the Group 
as a baseline. 

In 2019/20 our baseline was 434 Tonnes of CO2e. 

In addition, we have also calculated an intensity ratio based on added value. Added value is used as the intensity ratio 
(CO2e / £1M added value). The group defined “added value” as the “gross margin”. It is believed that this best represents 
business output and is therefore a valuable metric against which to judge environmental performance. In 2019/20 our 
baseline intensity ratio was 20.9 Tonnes per £1m of value added. 

G S Marsh 
Chief Executive Officer 
30 June 2020 

24 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT 

Statement of compliance against the UK Corporate Governance Guidance 

The Board of Directors believes in high standards of corporate governance and is responsible for ensuring that the Group 
has in place appropriate governance practices and is accountable to shareholders for the Group’s performance in this 
area. 

Solid  State PLC,  as  a quoted  company  on  AIM,  a market  operated  by The  London  Stock Exchange  PLC,  is required in 
accordance  with  AIM  rule  26  to  adopt  a  corporate  governance  code.  Solid  State  PLC  has  chosen  to  adopt  the  QCA 
corporate governance code (the “Code”) over the FRCs UK Corporate Governance Code.  

In  adopting  the  Code  the  Directors  have  provided  corporate  governance  disclosures  and  explain  how  the  company 
adopts the ten principles of the Code in a manner that is considered appropriate for our company. The Code is available 
on the QCA website at: www.theqca.com.    

This  statement  describes  how  the  Group  is  applying  the  relevant  principles  of  governance,  as  set  out  in  the  Code. 
Throughout the year ended 31 March 2020, the Group has applied the principles of the Code. In adopting the Code the 
board has also been cognisant of the guidance issued from other regulatory bodies in respect of best practice corporate 
governance such as the FRC to ensure that the governance framework adopted at Solid State PLC is rigorous, robust and 
appropriate for our size and structure.  

How the corporate governance principles are adopted at Solid State PLC 

The Board considers that throughout 2019/20, Solid State PLC has sought to comply with the “Ten Principles” within the 
code and this report sets out how the Board has done this through the year. This statement addresses the main subject 
areas of the Code namely; delivering growth, maintaining a dynamic management framework, and building trust. 

Principle 

Compliance 
status 

Explanation 

Further disclosure(s) 

Fully 
compliant 

Group business strategy is set out 
in the Chairman’s statement and 
the Strategic Review above.  

See the Chairman’s Statement 
on pages 3 to 4 and Strategic 
review on pages 5 to 21. 

Delivering growth 
Principle 1: -“Establish a 
strategy and business 
model which promote long-
term value for 
shareholders” 

Principle 2: - “Seek to 
understand and meet 
shareholder needs and 
expectations” 

Principle 3: - “Take into 
account wider stakeholder 
and social responsibilities 
and their implications for 
long-term success” 

Fully 
compliant 

Fully 
compliant 

Strategic issues, and the 
appropriate business model to 
exploit opportunities and mitigate 
risks, are under continuous review 
by the board. 

Regular meetings are held with 
shareholders at the release of 
interim and full year results, the 
AGM and a number of additional 
ad hoc meetings. 

Directors and the management 
team adopt a broad view during 
decision making to take 
meaningful account of the impact 
of our business on all key 
stakeholder groups. 

See further reporting on the 
stakeholder engagement 
provided on page 28 to 29 of 
this report and pages 22 to 24 
of the corporate and social 
responsibility report. 

See further reporting on the 
stakeholder engagement 
provided on page 28 to 29 of 
this report and pages 22 to 24 
of the corporate and social 
responsibility report. 

25 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

Compliance 
status 

Fully 
compliant 

Principle 

Principle 4: - “Embed 
effective risk management, 
considering both 
opportunities and threats, 
throughout the 
organisation” 

Explanation 

Further disclosure(s) 

The group operates a system of 
internal controls to safeguard 
group assets and protect the 
business from identified risks.  

These controls are subject to 
examination during the annual 
external audit process. 

See the risks identified and the 
mitigation and the report our 
risk management processes on 
pages 38 to 40 of this report 
and on pages 12 to 16 of the 
strategic report. 

See the Board and its sub 
committees’ section in this 
report on page 34 to 36. 

See the Board section in this 
report on pages 34 to 36. 

See the Board performance 
evaluation section in this report 
on page 36. 

Maintain a dynamic management framework 
Principle 5: - “Maintain the 
board as a well-functioning, 
balanced team led by the 
chair” 

Fully 
compliant 

At the year-end the Board 
comprises the Interim Non-
Executive Chairman; Mr P Haining, 
the Chief Executive Officer; Mr G S 
Marsh, three Executive Directors 
and one Non-Executive Director. 

Fully 
compliant 

Principle 6: - “ensure that 
between them the 
Directors have the 
necessary up-to-date 
experience, skills and 
capabilities” 

Principle 7: - “Evaluate 
board performance based 
on clear and relevant 
objectives, seeking 
continuous improvement” 

Partially 
compliant 

The board is satisfied that the 
current composition provides the 
required degree of skills, 
experience, diversity and 
capabilities appropriate to the 
needs of the business, following 
the appointment of Mr N F Rogers.  

The ongoing recruitment of a new 
Non-Executive to replace Mr A B 
Frere will provide an additional 
perspective and independence. 

The Board has completed an 
internal evaluation of performance 
which is led by the Remuneration 
Committee Chairman.  

The Chairman also actively 
encourages self-evaluation by all 
board members, and feedback on 
the conduct and content of board 
meetings.  

The board will continue to keep 
under review whether a more 
structured independent review is 
required in future. 

26 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

Principle 

Principle 8: - “promote a 
corporate culture that is 
based on ethical values and 
behaviours” 

Compliance 
status 

Fully 
compliant 

Explanation 

Further disclosure(s) 

The board expects high ethical and 
moral standards. The board and all 
employees expected to be 
accountable for their actions and 
in compliance with the Company 
handbook. Employees are actively 
encouraged to participate in 
training courses and maintain CPD. 

See the Board section in this 
report on pages 34 to 36 and 
the corporate and social 
responsibility report on pages 
22 to 24. 

Principle 9: - “Maintain 
governance structures and 
processes that are fit for 
purpose and support good 
decision-making by the 
board” 

Fully 
compliant 

The board as a whole take 
responsibility for ensuring 
appropriate corporate governance 
practices are adopted.  

See the Board section in this 
report on pages 34 to 36 and 
the audit committee report on 
pages 41 to 45. 

The roles and responsibilities of 
each of the Directors (including 
committee memberships) are 
clearly defined. 

Fully 
compliant 

Building trust 
Principle 10: -  
“Communicate how the 
company is governed and is 
performing by maintaining 
a dialogue with 
shareholders and other 
relevant stakeholders” 

Regular meetings with 
shareholders and other key 
stakeholder groups provide a 
specific opportunity for raising any 
concerns related to corporate 
governance, including any 
significant votes cast against or 
abstaining from shareholder 
resolutions. 

Further narrative disclosure is 
provided in: Corporate 
governance report on pages 25 
to 40, the corporate and social 
responsibility report on pages 
22 to 24 and the remuneration 
committee report on pages 46 
to 59. 

The  Board  views  maintaining  high  standards  in  its  governance  and  management  of  the  affairs  of  the  Group  as  a 
fundamental part of discharging its stewardship responsibilities.  

Accordingly,  both  the  Board  and  the  Audit  Committee  continue  to  keep  under  review  the  Group’s  whole  system  of 
internal  control,  which  comprises  not  only  financial  controls  but  also  operational  controls,  compliance  and  risk 
management.  

This process was in place throughout the 2020 financial year and accords with the Revised Guidance for Directors on Risk 
Management, Internal Control and Related Financial & Business Reporting (formerly called the Turnbull Guidance). 

27 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

How Solid State PLC has complied with the Companies Act Section 172 requirements and disclosures 
The following disclosure describes how the Directors have acted in the way they consider, in good faith, would be most 
likely to promote the success of the company for the benefit of its members as a whole, and in doing so have regard 
(amongst other matters) to the factors set out in section 172(1)(a) to (f). 

When performing their duties under section 172 of the Companies Act, they have considered the long-term 
consequences of decisions, matters affecting the Company’s employees and other stakeholder relationships, and the 
need to act fairly between members of the Company. 

Furthermore, they have recognised that companies are run for the benefit of their shareholders, but that the long-term 
success of a business is dependent on maintaining relationships with all significant stakeholders. The Board continuously 
reviews relationships that support the generation and preservation of value in the Company. These relationships include 
those with employees, suppliers, customers and industrial partners, and the Groups bankers. 

Stakeholder engagement 

Stakeholder 

Engagement method 

Investors 

The key investors identified are the shareholders and lenders. The major interests in 
our shares are set out in page 37 of our corporate governance report.  

Key metrics for both our bank and our shareholders are the share price, adjusted profit 
before taxation, adjusted earnings per share, cash generation and leverage.  

Through the publication of our half year and full year financial reports and our 
engagement with shareholders we look to provide insight where possible into the 
group strategy and how we look to create value for our shareholders by generating 
strong and sustainable results that translate into earnings and cash.  

We seek to promote an investor base that is interested in a long term holding in the 
company. Further disclosure of how we engage with our Investors is set out in the 
corporate governance report. 

Disclosure 
cross ref  

p.25 – p.40 

Employees 

Employees are those individuals who are contracted to work for the company both full 
and part time. 

p.22 – p.24 

The Group’s success is reliant on retaining the knowledgeable and skilled workforce 
who are committed to our business and the delivery of our strategy; maintaining and 
delivering on the high standards that the Group sets for itself. 

We have policies and procedures in place to look after the welfare of our employees, 
and we pride ourselves on a “Solid State family” culture which is friendly and supportive 
of all members of our team. 

Given the nature of our business we take health and safety extremely seriously and 
ensuring a best practice safe working environment is essential. We promote employee 
engagement, encourage employees to share ideas and to help us deliver on our goal of 
continuous improvement.  During the COVID-19 pandemic we have engaged with 
employees to ensure that they share ideas on how we can maximise the safety of the 
whole team which has delivered many valuable and practical operating practices which 
have been implemented across the Group. 

The knowledge and ability of our teams is a critical cornerstone of our value. Therefore, 
we encourage and offer training where it is considered beneficial to the employee and 
the company. Further disclosures are provided in our corporate and social responsibility 
report. 

28 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

Disclosure 
cross ref  

p.22 – p.24 

Stakeholder 

Engagement method 

Customers 
and 
Industrial 
Partners 

Our teams use their knowledge and ability to work collaboratively with our customers 
and industrial partners to provide a tailored component, product or service to meet 
their specific requirements and add value. 

Whilst we always aim to design, manufacture and supply products of the highest 
quality. We believe that we differentiate our offering in terms of how we engage with 
our customers and the relationships we build in providing a tailored solution. 

We meet these objectives by ensuring that our teams have the knowledge and 
expertise to meet or exceed the expectations of our customers and industrial partners.  

During the year, our customer engagements support and focus our investment in R&D 
to enable us to deliver continuously evolving technical solutions. 

Further disclosures are provided in our corporate and social responsibility report. 

Suppliers 

Our extensive supply chain relationships with component manufacturers are critical to 
ensuring that we can meet the customers’ technical requirements for their specific 
application. 

p.22 – p.24 

Our supplier relationships and partnerships are underpinned by the technical 
knowledge that our team has of the components which we distribute and design into 
our manufactured solutions. As a result, our relationships with our suppliers are a 
critical part of both our suppliers’ and our Group’s success. 

We regularly engage with our suppliers to discuss performance, price and how we can 
continue to improve our supply chain relationships to deliver mutual benefit.  

Key topics of engagement for the year were price and supply with the potential 
disruption that Brexit and latterly COVID 19 may cause. plans were agreed to help 
minimise any disruption to the supply chain. 

Further disclosures are provided in our corporate and social responsibility report. 

29 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

Principal decisions linked to our strategy and the stake holders impacted 

Principal 
decision 

Setting of 
annual 
financial 
budget and 
periodic 
updating of 
forecasts 

Basis of the decision and conclusion 

The board receives regular financial reports from the executive management, both 
historic and forward looking. The board endeavours to meet or exceed all stakeholder 
expectations where possible. Based on this the board issues appropriate stakeholder 
and market communication through relevant channels. 

Pleasingly, during the financial year ending 31 March 2020 we have seen significant 
commercial progress and have been able to upgrade the adjusted profit before tax 
expectations three times from £3.5m to £4.7m reported in this annual report. 

The annual financial budget for 2021 for the Group was approved in early March 2020, 
indicating a reasonable view that the results for the financial year would meet or 
exceed market expectation.  However, the rapid development of the COVID-19 virus 
meant that in Q1 the Board felt it was not appropriate to issue investor guidance due 
to the uncertainty that all businesses faced. 

While trading has continued well, we expect to issue market guidance once the 
Government lifts the restrictions in a sustainable manner. 

Primary 
Stakeholder  

Shareholders, 
lenders, 
employees 

Changes to 
board 

The Directors seek to ensure that the composition of the board is appropriate to the 
current circumstances and has enough capacity to manage growth and succession 
planning. 

Shareholders, 
employees 

Acquire 
Battery IP vs 
inhouse 
development 
of the IP 

During the year Mr N F Rogers joined the Board as an Independent Non-Executive 
Director replacing John Lavery who retired at the end of August 2019. 

On the 31 March 2020 Mr A B Frere retired from the Board as Chairman. The 
recruitment process for the new Chairman was on-going during Q4 and was hindered 
by COVID-19 distancing protocols.  

As a result, Mr P Haining, currently Non-Executive Director, assumed the role of 
Interim Chairman until such time as a permanent appointment can be made. 

Technology development is an integral part of continuing to deliver sustainable value 
for our stakeholders. One of the key areas where the Group is looking to enhance its 
existing capabilities is in the area of Battery Management Systems (BMS). The Board 
explored the risks and rewards of two strategic options:  

a) acquire a business which had the BMS IP the group was looking to add; or,  

b) invest in our in house engineering team to develop the capability.  

In making this decision the Board looked at two potential acquisition targets and 
evaluated an R&D appraisal put forward from the engineering team.  

The evaluation of the two potential acquisition targets concluded that they would 
enhance the BMS IP but there was insufficient additional incremental valued added 
beyond the IP. Therefore, the Board concluded that the best approach was to progress 
with the in house development which would be a substantially lower initial investment 
and could be tailored to meet specific customer requirements. Thus, matching 
investment with the development of commercial opportunities, while also enhancing 
the scale and capabilities of our employees and team. 

Employees, 
Customers 
and 
commercial 
partners 

30 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Primary 
Stakeholder  

Customers 
and 
commercial 
partners, 
Suppliers, 
Employees 

Principal 
decision 

Integration 
of the Pacer 
businesses 
into the VAD 
division and 
systems 
upgrade. 

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

Basis of the decision and conclusion 

Post acquisition as part of the strategic review with the input of the VAD and Pacer 
team the Board approved the strategy for the integration of Pacer.  

The key decision was that the maximum value could be realised through integrating 
Pacer’s opto-electronic offering into the Valued Added Distribution division giving the 
VAD division significantly enhanced value-add capabilities and scale that it could 
leverage.  

As part of this it was identified that the enterprise resource planning systems (ERP) 
would need to be improved. The Board concluded that investing in a platform which 
could service the distribution, assembly and manufacturing operations whilst 
facilitating consistent reporting and metrics was a critical part of the integration into 
the VAD division. 

A project team was set up to evaluate the options and make a recommendation to the 
divisional MD and Board. The project team completed a comprehensive evaluation and 
project plan which was communicated to the Board by the Divisional MD. The Board 
challenged, considered, and evaluated; the level of investment; the employee training 
requirement; customer and supplier interactions; and, how alternative options were 
considered by the Project team in reaching their recommendation to the Board.  

The recommendation was to upgrade the Microsoft system used by Pacer, considered 
the lowest risk approach both in terms of investment and operational risk. The Board 
approved the investment and the project plan to upgrade the Pacer systems to the 
latest version. 

The initial plan was to upgrade the system by the end of March 2020, however, with 
the complexity of implementing consistent reporting, combined with the significant 
restrictions and additional demands on the IT resources to enable home working as a 
result of COVID-19, it was recommended to the board that the project be paused.  

The existing systems do what is needed and are stable and reliable, therefore the Board 
agreed it was appropriate to pause the project until the restrictions have been lifted. 
The project could then be delivered in-line with the plan which manages the project 
and operational risks appropriately with comprehensive testing and training being 
completed to ensure a successful implementation.  

Banking 
facilities 

The group has a proactive and constructive relationship with its bankers, Lloyds Bank 
PLC.   

All 

Pleasingly the term loan drawn in 2018 to fund the acquisition of Pacer was repaid early 
with the final repayment being made in May 2020. In making these early repayments 
the Group has agreed that the unutilised revolving credit facility be increased to £7.5m 
and extended to 30 November 2021 to maintain funding flexibility. 

31 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Principal 
decision 

COVID-19 
management 
and risk 
mitigation 

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

Basis of the decision and conclusion 

Primary 
Stakeholder  

The COVID-19 virus presented unprecedented challenges to all businesses at the end of 
our financial year and into the new year, due to the restrictions on mobility and social 
distancing guidance issued by the government to reduce the risk of the virus spreading. 

All 

Due to significant advanced planning and preparation for home working and social 
distancing the Board evaluation determined that it was appropriate for the business to 
continue to operate and supply products to meet customers demand whilst adhering to 
the safe working guidance. 

In making the decision to continue to operate, the board ensured that all staff that 
could work from home did work from home. COVID-19 is affecting the business in 
contrasting ways: Solid State has been notified by numerous customers in both its 
Manufacturing and VAD divisions that the Group has been designated a critical supplier 
under the government’s critical industries and key workers guidance.  Sectors 
highlighting this dependency include medical, food retail, security and defence. 

Conversely, the Group is experiencing softness in the markets for batteries, for 
aerospace products and from the oil & gas industry due to the fall in oil prices and 
lower demand for computing products in some niche markets in the industrial sector. 

Where production operations could not be done from home the Board ensured that the 
four manufacturing sites remained open, operated effectively, while adhering to best 
practice guidelines on social distancing and hygiene protocols. 

As a result of the impact seen on customer demand in conjunction with the operational 
changes required to ensure that social distancing is maintained, the Board made the 
decision to furlough a number of staff under the government COVID-19 job retention 
scheme. 

Detailed Covid-19 specific risk assessments have been completed and published for all 
sites. Additionally, the Group continues to hold relatively high levels of stock to limit 
exposure to supply chain volatility. At 31 March 2020, the Group held  c.2.5 months’ 
stock. 

Whilst the Group had net cash of £3.2m at 31 March 2020 and has a £7.5m unutilised 
Revolving Credit Facility, the Board has taken a number of measures to conserve cash 
as a result of the COVID-19 uncertainty. 

The Board has opted to take advantage of the available government support measures 
through time to pay against both PAYE and VAT. 

Internal cash management decisions have been taken to ensure cash conservation in 
the short-term. These include:  

•  Recruitment freeze;  
•  Deferment of salary increases for all Directors and staff;  
•  Deferment of FY19/20 bonus payments for Directors and staff until the end of Q1. 

In addition, the Group’s acquisition strategy has been suspended temporarily during 
this period of uncertainty. Communication continues with prospective acquisitions, 
however progress will be limited in the short-term.  

New planned capex has been suspended, however, committed ongoing projects to 
improve safety and ERP system upgrades are continuing. 

The Board is continuing to keep this under close review, taking prudent steps to 
manage its cashflow and cost base to withstand this near-term uncertainty. 

32 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

The Board  

During 2020 the Group has made significant progress in refreshing the Board to take the business through to the next 
phase of its development. 

Ahead of the retirement of Mr J M Lavery on 31 August 2019, Mr N F Rogers joined the Board in 1 July 2019. He has 
bought a wealth of experience and knowledge  to the Board and his industry experience has enabled him to get up to 
speed with the business quickly.  

Following the retirement of Mr A B Frere as Chairman on the 31 March 2020, the recruitment process for the new Non-
Executive Director and the appointment of a full time Chairman is not yet concluded and is now being hindered by COVID-
19  distancing  protocols.  As  a result,  Mr  P  Haining,  currently  Non-Executive  Director,  has  assumed  the role  of Interim 
Chairman until such time as a permanent appointment can been made. 

The Board has acknowledged that one its Non-Executive Directors would be independent in accordance with the  FRC 
Code and the other is not.  However the QCA guidelines acknowledge for growing companies it may not be possible for 
boards to meet the definition uof “independence” for all Non-Executive Directors and sets out that it is important for 
the board to foster an attitude of independence of character and judgement, and the fact that a Director has served for 
more than nine years does not automatically affect independence, although concurrent tenure with management could 
hinder  the  ability  to  be  objective.  Based  on  the  QCA  guidelines  the  Board  conclude  that  all  the  Non-Executives  are 
independent in terms of character and judgement in how they execute their role as Non-Executive Directors.  

The Board is mindful of the threats to independence and actively manages the potential risk to ensure that the  Non-
Executives provide independent constructive challenge. The terms and conditions of appointment of the Non-Executive 
Directors are available for inspection upon request to the Company Secretary.  

Rules concerning the appointment and replacement of Directors of the Group are contained in the Articles of Association 
(“Articles”). Amendments to the Articles must be approved by a special resolution of shareholders. Under the Articles, 
all Directors are subject to election by shareholders at the first Annual General Meeting following their appointment, 
and to re-election thereafter at intervals of no more than three years. 

The Board has considered the FRC’s guidance to companies outside the FTSE 350 to consider the annual re-election of 
all Directors and consider that this would be overly burdensome for the current nature of the Group. Biographies of the 
Directors are set out on page 62. These show the range of business and financial experience upon which the Board is 
able to call. 

The Board’s goal is to ensure that its membership should be balanced between Executives and Non-Executives and have 
the appropriate skills and experience and knowledge of the business. The Board recognises the special position and role 
of the Chairman under the Code and has approved the formal division of responsibilities between the Chairman and 
Chief Executive Officer.  

The Chairman is responsible for the leadership of the Board and ensuring its effectiveness, and the Chief Executive Officer 
manages the Group and has the prime role, with the assistance of the Board, of developing and implementing business 
strategy. 

One  of  the  roles  of  the  Non-Executive  Directors  under  the  leadership  of  the  Chairman  is  to  undertake  detailed 
examination and discussion of the strategies proposed by the Executive Directors, so as to ensure that decisions are in 
the best long term interests of shareholders and take proper account of the interests of the Group’s other stakeholders.  

The Chairman ensures that meetings of Non-Executive Directors without the Executive Directors are held. 

33 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

How the Board operates 

The  Board  meets  regularly  through  the  year  and  is  provided  with  appropriate  strategic,  operational  and  financial 
information prior to each meeting with monthly reports to enable it to monitor the performance of the Group. 

Directors are required to devote such time and effort to their duties as is required to secure their proper discharge and, 
for  Non-Executive  Directors,  his  typically  entails  one  or  two  days  of  meetings  per  month  as  well  as  reading  and 
preparation time. 

At Board meetings the Chairman ensures that all Directors are able to make an effective contribution and every Director 
is  encouraged  to  participate  and  provide  their  perspective  and  opinions.  The  Chairman  always  seeks  to  achieve 
unanimous decisions of the Board following due discussion of agenda items. 

All Directors have direct access to the advice and services of the Company Secretary who is responsible for ensuring that 
Board procedures are followed and are allowed to take independent professional advice if necessary, at the Company’s 
expense. 

The Board has a formal schedule of matters referred to it for decision. This list includes appropriate strategic, financial, 
organisational  and  compliance  issues,  including  the  approval  of  high  level  announcements,  circulars,  the  report  and 
accounts and certain strategic and management issues. 

Examples of such items include but are not limited to: 

• 
• 
• 
• 
• 
• 
• 

the approval of interim and annual results; 
the approval of the annual budget; 
approval of acquisitions or disposals; 
approval of major items of capital expenditure; 
the approval of significant contracts; 
approval of changes to corporate or capital structure; and, 
financial issues, including changes in accounting policy, the approval of dividends, bank facilities and guarantees. 

Committees of the Board 

Executive Committee 

The Executive Committee consists of the Executive Directors under the chairmanship of Mr G S Marsh and is responsible 
for the development of strategy, annual budgets and operating plans linked to the management and control of the day-
to-day operations of the Group. 

The Executive Committee is also responsible for monitoring key commercial opportunities and relationships, day to day 
stakeholder engagement and for ensuring that the Board policies are carried out on a Group-wide basis. 

Nominations Committee 

The Nominations Committee is formed when required as a sub-committee of the Board. The Nominations committee 
was  formed  and  oversaw  the  recruitment process  to  appoint  Mr  N  F  Rogers  as  a  Non-Executive  Director  which  was 
completed in the current financial period.  

The Nominations committee took responsibility for identifying; the skills, experience, personal qualities and capabilities 
required for the next stage in the company’s development, linked to the company’s strategy.  

The  nominations  committee  appointed  an  external  agency  to  assist  with  the  recruitment  process  based  on  the 
specification set out to ensure that a comprehensive list of suitable candidates was identified in a “long list”. From the 
long list the committee completed the initial review of the candidates and first round interviews to identify a shortlist of 
preferred candidates that were interviewed by the whole Board to select the preferred candidate for the role.  

The Nominations Committee is in the process of recruiting a replacement Non-Executive to join the Board following the 
retirement of Mr A B Frere at the end of March. This process is following the same approach as has been set out above 
however as a result of the COVID-19 restrictions this is on-going and is expected to take some time before the process 
can be finalised and an appointment made. 

34 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

Audit Committee 

The Audit Committee consists of the Non-Executive Directors; Mr P Haining and Mr N Rogers. The Committee meets at 
least twice a year under the Chairmanship of Mr P Haining, who the Board has evaluated to have recent relevant financial 
experience.  

The  Chairman  of  the  Audit  Committee  is  not  deemed independent  by  virtue  of  his  length  of  service  and  that  he  has 
previously held an Executive position. However, given that the Board considers that Mr P Haining fulfils the role with 
independence  of  character  and  judgement,  the  Board  has  concluded  that  it  is  appropriate  to  retain  the  financial 
experience and knowledge of the business possessed by Mr P Haining in his role as Chairman of the Audit Committee.  

The Audit Committee has specific written terms of reference which deal with its authority and responsibilities and these 
are available for inspection from the Company Secretary. Its duties include monitoring internal controls throughout the 
Group,  approving  the  Group’s  accounting  policies,  and  reviewing  the  Group’s  interim  results  and  full  year  financial 
statements before submission to the full Board. The Audit Committee also reviews and approves the scope and content 
of the Group’s annual risk assessment programme and the annual audit and monitors the independence of the external 
auditors. 

The Audit Committee acts to ensure that the financial performance of the Group is properly recorded and monitored, in 
fulfilling their role they meet annually with the auditors and review the reports from the auditors relating to accounts 
and internal control systems.  

The Group does not have an independent Internal Audit function, as it is not considered appropriate given the scale of 
the Group’s operations, however the Group operates internal peer reviews, with a scope of evaluating and testing the 
Group’s financial control procedures, to standardise processes around best practice. Any significant issues are reported 
to the Chairman of the Audit Committee and shared with the external auditors as appropriate. 

The  Group  Finance  Director  and  the  external  auditors  attend  meetings  of  the  Audit  Committee  by  invitation.  The 
Committee also holds separate meetings with the external auditors, as appropriate.  

Remuneration Committee 

The Remuneration Committee consists of Mr  N Rogers and Mr P Haining. The Committee meets at least twice a year 
under the Chairmanship of Mr N Rogers.  

The  Chief  Executive  Officer  and  Group  Finance  Director  have  attended  some  of  the  meetings  of  the  Remuneration 
Committee  by  invitation  to  respond  to  questions  raised  by  the  Committee,  but  they  are  excluded  from  any  matter 
concerning the details of their own remuneration. 

The Remuneration Committee has specific terms of reference which deal with its authority and duties and these are 
available for inspection from the Company Secretary. 

The purpose of the committee is to review the performance of the full time Executive Directors and to set the scale and 
structure  of  their  remuneration  and  the  basis  of  their  service  agreements  with  due  regard  to  the  interests  of  the 
shareholders. In fulfilling this responsibility, the Remuneration Committee is responsible for setting salaries, incentives 
and other benefit arrangements of Executive Directors and overseeing the Group’s employee share schemes. 

Members of the Remuneration Committee do not participate in decisions concerning their own remuneration. Further 
details are provided in the remuneration report on pages 46 to 59. 

35 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

Attendance at meetings 

Number of meetings in 2019/20 

Attendance 

Executive 
Mr G S Marsh 
Mr J L Macmichael 
Mr M T Richards 
Mr P O James 

Non-executive 
Mr A B Frere (retired 31 March 2020) 
Mr P Haining 
Mr J M Lavery (retired 31 August 2019) 
Mr N Rogers (appointed 1 July 2019 

Board performance evaluation 

Board  Audit Committee 

Remuneration 
Committee 

10 

9 
10 
10 
10 

9 
10 
2 
6 

3 

6 

n/a 
n/a 
n/a 
3 

3 
3 
n/a 
1 

n/a 
n/a 
n/a 
n/a 

6 
6 
n/a 
6 

The  Chief  Executive  reviews  the  performance  of  the  Executive  Directors  on  a  periodic  basis  and  reports  to  the 
Remuneration Committee. 

The  performance  of  the Directors,  the  Chairman  and  of  the  Board  are  monitored  on  an  ongoing  basis.  Annually  the 
Remuneration Committee evaluates performance as part of the review of remuneration and discretionary bonus awards. 

During 2018/19 the Board and the Remuneration Committee evaluated the Board performance, including but not limited 
to Board balance, Board skills and remuneration, to ensure that the Board structure is fit for purpose and is appropriate 
for the next phase of the Group’s development and growth. Given the on-going recruitment and changes to the Board 
during 2019/20 no formal whole Board performance evaluation was undertaken during the year, however, the Board 
agreed that a full review will be completed during 2020/21 once the new Non-Executive board member is recruited and 
is in post. 

This Board has completed an informal review which identified that the Board continued to make progress against its 
strategy with the current trading performance ahead of the Board’s expectations. As a result of the pleasing performance 
in the current year the Executive Directors’ share bonus options vested, bonuses and salary increases were awarded to 
the Executive Board Members. Further details are provided in the remuneration report on pages 46 to 59. 

36 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

Shareholder relations 

The Board regards regular communications with shareholders as one of its key responsibilities. During 2019/20, the Chief 
Executive Officer and Group Finance Director met with institutional investors on a regular basis to discuss the Group’s 
performance, the shareholder’s views, and to ensure that the strategies and objectives of the Group are well understood. 

The Chief Executive Officer keeps the Board fully informed of any significant matters discussed with shareholders and of 
shareholders’ views. In addition to this the Board receives copies of the analysts’ reports which the Company is made 
aware of. 

The  Non-Executive  Directors,  having  considered  the  Code,  are  of  the  view  that  this  approach  to  shareholder 
communication remains appropriate for the Group. However, should shareholders have concerns which they feel cannot 
be resolved through normal shareholder meetings, the Chairman, and the remaining Non-Executive Directors may be 
contacted through the Company Secretary. 

Interim and full year-end shareholder roadshows are held by the Executive Directors together with a Capital Markets 
Lunch.   The  Company  also  arranges  investor  site  visits  typically  twice  a  year.  These  events  enable  shareholders  and 
potential  shareholders  to  understand  first-hand  the  business,  visit  the  operations  and  meet  the  wider  team.  
Furthermore, shareholders attending the AGM are invited to ask the Directors questions about the business. Other than 
our routine engagement with investors on topics of strategy, governance and performance, the other specific matter 
discussed with key shareholders included changes to the board and the Director remuneration policy.   

The Company also maintains the Group’s website, which provides details of the Group’s business including its strategy, 
technologies, operations and products. The Group website has a separate investor relations section which provides the 
Group’s news flow, share price information, and financial reports including the annual and interim reports. Hard copies 
of these financial reports are also available by request. The website can be found at: www.solidstateplc.com. 

In accordance with the recommendations of the Code, the Company will advise shareholders attending the AGM of the 
number  of  proxy  votes  lodged  in  respect  of  each  resolution,  analysed  between  ‘For’,  ‘Against’,  ‘at  the  Chairman’s 
discretion’ and ‘abstentions’. These are advised after the resolutions have been dealt with on a show of hands, providing 
that a poll has not been called for or required. 

Significant Shareholders 

Shareholders over 3%* 

Schroders 

Mrs J Comben 

Mr & Mrs W Marsh 

Seguro Nominees Limited 

Charles Stanley & Co 

BGF Investment Management Limited 

Canaccord Genuity Group Inc 

Mr G Marsh 

Cavendish Asset Management 

% holding 

11.00% 

8.86% 

7.61% 

7.55% 

6.45% 

5.42% 

4.46% 

3.29% 

3.24% 

*Significant shareholders that the board has been notified of as at 31 March 2020 the Solid State PLC website is kept updated for notified changes during the year.  

37 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

Audit and Accountability 

The  Code requires  that Directors review  the  effectiveness of  the  Group’s  system  of internal controls  on  a  continuing 
basis. The scope of the review covers all key controls including financial, operational and compliance controls as well as 
risk management. 

The  Board  has  put  in  place  a  framework  of  internal  controls  to  manage  the  risks  faced  by  the  Group  and  the  Audit 
Committee has responsibility to review, monitor and make policy recommendations to the Board upon all such matters. 

The Directors acknowledge their responsibility for the Group’s system of internal control. The Board, through the Audit 
Committee, keeps this system under continuous review and formally considers its content and its effectiveness on a bi-
annual  basis.  In  completing  their  review  of  the  effectiveness  of  the  Group’s  system  of  internal  controls  the  Audit 
Committee has taken account of any material developments up to the date of the signing of the financial statements. In 
addition, recognition is given to the external audit findings, which help to inform the Audit Committee’s views of areas 
of increased risk. 

The system of internal control comprises those controls established in order to provide assurance that the assets of the 
Group  are  safeguarded  against  unauthorised  use  or  disposal  and  to  ensure  the  maintenance  of  proper  accounting 
records and the reliability of financial information used within the business or for publication. 

Any system of internal control can only provide reasonable, but not absolute, assurance against material misstatement 
or loss, as it is designed to manage rather than to eliminate the risk of failing to achieve the business objectives of the 
Group. 

The  Directors  acknowledge  their  responsibility  for  preparing  the  Annual  Report  and  Accounts.  The  Audit  Committee 
reviews the Group’s reporting processes with the aim of ensuring that the financial reporting, when taken as a whole, is 
fair, balanced and understandable, and provides the information necessary for shareholders to assess the Company’s 
position and performance, business model and strategy. 

Risk Management 

The  Board  reviews  and  approves  an  Annual  Budget  and  Business  Plan  prior  to  the  start  of  each  financial  year.  This 
includes reviewing the key strategic, operational and financial objectives for the year, together with a detailed financial 
budget. 

The Executive Committee is accountable to the Board for delivery of the Annual Business Plan. The Executives report 
performance against the plan on a monthly basis, which includes detailed analysis of budgetary variances and updated 
financial projections. 

Each  Executive  Director  is  responsible  for  identifying  and  managing  the  risks  relating  to  their  respective  areas  of 
responsibility, including the risks relating to strategy, the Annual Business Plan and day-to-day business. 

To provide a framework for the delivery of the Group’s strategy and plans, the Executive Committee has developed an 
organisational structure with clear roles and responsibilities and clear lines of reporting.  

In addition to day-to-day risk management the Executive Directors formally assess the major business risks and evaluate 
their  potential  impact  on  the Group. These  risks  and  the  reporting  of  the  risk  assessment is  included in  the  strategic 
report on pages 12 to 16. 

Internal Control  

In  respect  of  internal  controls,  the  Directors  are  continually  reviewing  the  effectiveness  of  the  systems  of  internal 
controls. The key elements of which, having regard to the size of the Group, are that the Board meets regularly and takes 
the decisions on all material matters. The organisational structure ensures that responsibilities are defined, authority 
only delegated where appropriate and that the regular management accounts are presented to the Board wherein the 
financial performance of the Group is analysed. 

Further details over the internal controls are set out in the Audit Committee report on page 41 to 45. 

The Directors acknowledge that they are responsible for the system of internal control, which is established in order to 
safeguard the assets, maintain proper accounting records and ensure that financial information used within the business 
or  published  is  reliable.  Any  such  system  of  control  can,  however,  only  provide  reasonable,  not  absolute  assurance 
against material misstatement or loss. 

38 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

Going Concern 

In assessing the going concern position of the Group for the Consolidated Financial Statements for the year ended 31 
March 2020, the Directors have considered the Group’s cash flows, liquidity and business activities.  

At 31 March 2020, the Group had cash balances of £3.5 million, a drawn term loan of £0.3m (which was repaid post year 
end in May 2020) and an undrawn revolving credit facility (RCF) of £7.5 million.  

The bank facilities are subject to financial covenants requiring the business to be EBITDA positive therefore this facility 
is available to fund investment in working capital, capital investment or acquisition activities. Should the business face 
such a significant down turn that it was loss making the facility would not be available to be drawn to fund additional 
losses without a covenant waiver of amendment. As a result, in evaluating a stressed model the Board have not included 
the RCF in the headroom. 

Based  on  the  Group’s  forecasts,  the  Directors  have  adopted  the  going  concern  basis  in  preparing  the  Financial 
Statements.  The  Directors  have  made  this  assessment  after  consideration  of  the  Group’s  cash  flows  and  related 
assumptions  and  in  accordance  with  the  Guidance  on  Risk  Management,  Internal  Control  and  Related  Financial  and 
Business Reporting 2014, the April 2016 guidance on Going concern basis of accounting and reporting on solvency and 
liquidity risks  and  the various guidance issued  in  2020  all  published  by  the  UK  Financial  Reporting  Council  to  provide 
support to Directors and board in making the assessment of going concern.  

Additional disclosures in respect of the Directors’ assessment and modelling to support the conclusions below are set 
out on page 76 and 77 of the basis of preparation.  

The Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Group has adequate resources to continue in operational existence 
for the next 12 months, therefore it is appropriate to adopt a going concern basis for the preparation of the Financial 
Statements.  Accordingly,  these  financial  statements  do  not  include  any  adjustments  to  the  carrying  amount  or 
classification of assets and liabilities that would result if the Group and Company were unable to continue as a going 
concern. 

Long term viability statement 

The Directors have assessed the viability of the Group considering the Group’s current position and the potential impact 
of  the principal  and  emerging  risks  documented  above  that  would  threaten its  business  model,  future  performance, 
solvency, or liquidity.  

As indicated under the Going Concern assessment above, the Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Group 
has adequate resources to continue in operational existence for the next 12 months and that the Company will be able 
to continue in operation and meet its liabilities as they fall due over the period to 30 June 2021.  

The Directors have determined that a 2 year period to 31 March 2022 is an appropriate period over which to assess its 
viability statement. This is based on the significant amount of change that can arise over 2 years in the electronic and 
optoelectronics market; our business; and, in the macro-economic environment. This has been proved by the impact 
that COVID-19 has had on our business, the UK and the World economy.  

The Board carried out a robust assessment of the principal risks facing the Group, including those that would threaten 
its growth drivers, future performance, solvency, or liquidity.  

As  noted  above  the  Board  has  also  performed  specific  stress  testing  on  the  impact  of  the  COVID-19  pandemic.  The 
outputs  from  these  reviews  were  then  used  to  perform  liquidity  analysis  on  the  strategic  plan  and  the  COVID-19 
scenarios, including the downside sensitivity reviews that were based on principal risks. 

The impact of COVID-19 is affecting many of the principal risks detailed above and as such is the most significant factor 
impacting near and mid-term future financial performance. Although the Company’s response to the COVID-19 crisis is 
management’s  key  focus  at  this  time,  the  Directors  consider  the  mid  and  longer  term  opportunity  in  the  UK 
manufacturing and value added distribution businesses will remain very strong. 

39 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

Long term viability statement – cont’ 

The expectation over the strength of the market is supported by the significant structural technological enhancements 
(such as: Connectivity / 5G; Sensing; AI /Big data; and, Green tech), where the electronic and opto-electronic component 
& manufactured solutions we provide are expected to be critical elements of these enhancements. This alignment with 
the Group’s strategy and core capabilities means that the Board believe that the Group will be very well placed to take 
advantage of these macro opportunities once the adverse impact of the COVID-19 pandemic is overcome. 

G S Marsh 
Chief Executive Officer 
30 June 2020 

40 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT 

The Audit Committee is chaired by Mr P Haining FCA, a Chartered Accountant. He is considered by the Board and Audit 
Committee to have the necessary current relevant financial knowledge, qualifications and experience for this role. 

In  accordance  with  the  QCA guidance  the Board  has  reviewed  and  evaluated Mr  P  Haining’s  performance  as  a  Non-
Executive Director and confirm that he remains independent in terms of both his character, his judgement and based on 
how he conducts himself as a Non-Executive Director and chair of the Audit Committee. 

Therefore,  given  the  knowledge,  experience  and  skills  of Mr P  Haining  the Board  consider  that  he  remains  the most 
appropriate member of the Board to Chair the Audit Committee. 

Primary responsibilities of the audit committee: 

•  Reviewing the effectiveness of the Group’s procedures for the identification, assessment and reporting of risk, 

financial reporting processes and internal control policies.  

•  Managing  the  relationship  with  the  auditors  to  ensure  that  the  external  audit  is  effective,  objective, 
independent and of a high quality. Furthermore, the Audit Committee ensures that the scope of the audit, the 
auditors’ terms of engagement, and fees are reasonable and appropriate. 

•  Considering whether there is a need for an internal audit function and make a recommendation to the Board 
as to what is appropriate for the Board to gain assurance over the financial processes, procedures, controls and 
reporting of the group. 

•  Reviewing significant financial reporting issues, accounting policies, and judgements and estimates adopted by 
management and monitoring the integrity of the Group’s financial statements independently of the Executive 
Directors and external auditors. 

•  Advising the Board on whether the Committee believes the Annual Report and Accounts, taken as a whole, are 
fair, balanced and understandable and provide the information necessary for shareholders to assess the Group 
and Company’s performance, business model and strategy. 

Activities during the year: 

The Audit Committee met three times during the year. The meetings were also attended by the Group Finance Director, 
and representatives of the Group’s external auditors by invitation. 

At  meetings  attended  by  the  external  auditors,  time  is  allowed  for  the  Audit  Committee  to  discuss  issues  with  the 
external auditors without the Group Finance Director being present. 

As part of the Audit Committee’s review process, the Chairman of the Audit Committee and the Group Finance Director 
visit each of the group’s major business units across the year to review and challenge the local management on their 
draft financial results.  

The Chairman reports his observations from these visits to the Audit Committee and the Board as part of the process for 
approving of the Annual Report and Accounts. 

The Committee operates under formal terms of reference and these are reviewed annually. An annual rolling agenda is 
used  to  ensure  that  all  matters  within  the  Audit  Committee’s  Terms  of  Reference  during  the  year  are  appropriately 
covered. The Committee considers that it has discharged its responsibilities as set out in its terms of reference to the 
extent appropriate during the year. 

Financial reporting 

The Audit Committee reviewed the appropriateness of the Group’s interim and full year financial statements, including 
evaluating the significant financial reporting judgments made by management to ensure that they were appropriate, 
considering the reports from management and ensuring that the external auditors concurred with management and the 
committee’s conclusions.  

The main areas of focus considered by the Committee during 2019/20 were as follows: 

The presentation of the financial statements, including the presentation of adjusted performance measures. 

Following  review  of  reports  from  management  the  Committee  concurred  that  the  presentation  of  the  adjusted 
performance measures are appropriate, balanced and enables the users of the accounts to understand the underlying 
and on-going performance of the business. In finalising the accounts, the committee noted that the external auditors 
materially concurred with management and the committee’s conclusions. 

41 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

Going concern 

The Committee assessed the appropriateness of the going concern assumption. In doing this the committee reviewed 
the resources available to the Group, taking account of the Group’s trading and cash flow forecast together with available 
funding headroom in these very uncertain trading times because of the impact of COVID-19. Based on this as disclosed 
on  pages  39,76  and  77  in  the  basis  of  preparation  the  committee  concluded  that  the  Going  Concern  principle  was 
appropriate. In finalising the accounts, the committee noted that the external auditors accepted management and the 
committee’s conclusions. 

Review of the impact of the new leases standard IFRS 16. 

The Committee reviewed the reports prepared by management which set out the impact of adopting the new standard 
which will come into effect for the year ending 31 March 2020.  

The  report  identifies  that  there  will  likely  be  a  significant  impact  on  the  presentation  of  both  the  statement  of 
comprehensive income and the statement of financial position.  

On  adoption  the  Group  has  elected  to  adopt  IFRS16  using  the  modified  retrospective  transition  approach,  with  the 
cumulative effect of adopting the new standard being recognised in equity as an adjustment to the opening balance of 
retained earnings for the current period. 

The  standard  requires  that  material  leases  are  recognised  on  the  statement  of  financial  position  within  non-current 
assets as a “right to use asset” which will be depreciated. A right of use liability is recognised in respect of future payment 
obligations. 

The  committee  reviewed  the  key  judgements  in  determining  the  value  of  the  right  of  use  assets  and  liabilities  and 
disclosure and the accounting policies section of the accounts to ensure that the users of the accounts were given a clear 
indication of the impact of the adoption and restatement which is reflected in the accounts. In finalising the accounts, 
the committee noted that the external auditors materially concurred with management and the committee’s conclusions 
that the disclosure in the current year was appropriate. 

Review for the potential impairment of goodwill and other intangible assets.  

The  Committee  reviewed  and  challenged  the  key  assumptions,  judgements  and  sensitivities  in  the  report  from 
management. The Committee concurred that the expected future cash flows of the group support the carrying value of 
goodwill and other intangible assets, and that there were no triggering events which suggested any potential impairment 
of goodwill and other intangible assets. 

Review of product development costs capitalised. 

Following  review  of  reports  from  management  and  discussion  with  the  Head  of  Manufacturing  Engineering  and 
Operations, the Committee concurred that the product development costs were capital in nature, and that the treatment 
was in accordance with IAS 38. 

Accounting for R&D tax credits. 

Following review of reports from management and correspondence with the companies’ R&D tax advisors, setting out 
the  level  of  the  R&D  claim,  the  level  of  the  R&D  tax  credit  which  is  deferred  and  amortised  to  match  to  capitalised 
development programmes, the Committee concurred that the R&D tax credit accounting was appropriate 

Review of judgemental areas, and specifically the level of accounting provisions.  

Following review of reports from management the Committee concurred that the provisioning policy had been applied 
consistently and the level of provisions remains appropriate. 

42 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

Annual report 

At  the  request  of  the  Board  the  Committee  considered  whether  the  2019/20  annual  report  was  fair,  balanced  and 
understandable and whether it provided the relevant information for stakeholders to assess the Group’s performance, 
business model and strategy. 

Having taken account of the other information provided to the Board throughout the year, the Committee was satisfied 
that, taken as a whole, the annual report was fair, balanced and understandable. 

The Committee was satisfied that based on its review, challenge and debate of the draft financial statements and the 
key accounting items, that the assumptions made, the judgements applied, and the accounting and disclosures were 
appropriate. 

The  Committee  reviewed  and  recommended  the  approval  of  the  narrative  reporting  statements  on  corporate 
governance, internal control and risk management in the annual report and the half year and trading statements. 

External auditors 

The  Audit  Committee  has  developed  a  formal  Auditor  Independence  Policy.  In  accordance  with  this  policy,  the 
Committee oversees the relationship with the external auditors and monitors all services provided by them and all fees 
payable to them. This is to ensure that potential conflicts of interest are considered, and that an independent, objective 
and professional relationship is maintained. 

RSM UK Audit LLP (“RSM”) were appointed last year following an audit tender process. Following the completion of the 
first year audit a comprehensive debrief was completed to ensure that the value from the audit was maximised for all 
stakeholders. The output of the debrief formed part of the audit planning and scoping process to ensure continuous 
improvement. 

The  Audit  Committee  also  monitors  the  effectiveness  of  the  annual  audit.  In  advance  of  the  financial  year  end,  the 
Committee receives a detailed audit plan from the auditors which identifies the auditors’ assessment of the key risks and 
their intended areas of focus. This is agreed with the Committee to ensure that the scope and coverage of audit work is 
appropriate. 

Based on the scope of work the committee ensure that the proposed fees are fair and reasonable and represent value 
for the services provided. 

As in prior years the provision of external audit and tax compliance are separated where practical. As such tax advice is 
provided by Bevan Buckland LLP and The Kings Mill Practice.  

In addition, Solid State PLC’s management also provide the Committee with feedback on their view of the quality and 
effectiveness of the audit. This feedback is considered in conjunction with the Committee’s own review of the auditor’s 
performance in delivering an effective, objective, independent and a high-quality audit. 

Based on the prior year audit and the review completed of this year’s services delivered in respect of the 2019/20 audit 
of Solid State PLC both management and the audit committee were satisfied that there had been appropriate focus and 
challenge on the primary areas of audit risk and they assessed the quality of the audit process as good. 

43 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

Non-audit services 

The  Committee  also  regularly  reviews  the  nature,  extent,  objectivity  and  cost  of  non-audit  services  provided  by  the 
external auditors.  

Under this policy, the award to the Group’s auditors of audit related services, tax consulting services or other non-audit 
related services in excess of £10,000 must first be approved by the Audit Committee. The policy also sets out guidelines 
for the recruitment of employees or former employees of the external auditor.  

During  the  year,  the  audit  committee  approved  non-audit services  in  respect  of  some  preliminary  due  diligence  and 
employment  and  remuneration  services.  The  committee  reviewed  the  potential  threats  to  independence  and  the 
associated safeguards and concluded that independence would be maintained. 

In addition, the Group’s auditors are required to make a formal report to the Audit Committee annually on the safeguards 
that are in place to maintain their independence and the internal safeguards in place to ensure their objectivity. 

The nature of the services provided by the auditors and the amounts paid to them are as detailed below: 

RSM UK audit LLP (Group auditors) 

Fees payable to company’s auditors for the audit of the parent company 
accounts and consolidated financial statements 
Fees payable to company’s auditor and its associates for other services: 

The audit of the company’s subsidiaries 

• 
•  Other assurance services 
• 

Taxation services 

Services relating to corporate finance transactions 

• 
•  Other non-audit services 

Total fees payable to the Group auditors 

31 March 20 
£’000 

31 March 19 
£’000 

75 

- 

1 

- 

9 

18 

63 

17 

- 

- 

- 

- 

_______ 

103 

_______ 

_______ 

80 

_______ 

The audit scope for the year ended 31 March 2020 relates to the audit of the Consolidated Group Accounts and that of 
the parent company. The UK trading subsidiaries have adopted the exemption from the requirements to file audited 
financial statements by virtue of section 479A of the Companies Act 2006. In adopting the exemption Solid State PLC has 
provided a statutory guarantee to these subsidiaries in accordance with section 479C of the Companies Act 2006. 

44 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

Internal Audit 

The Board asks the Audit Committee to review annually the requirement for an internal audit function, having regard to 
the size of the Group, the costs of such a function versus the likely benefit and the sufficiency of the assurance to validate 
the functioning of the system of internal control, given the operational and financial circumstances facing the Group. 

Based on the review of the management reporting and external audit assurances over controls and financial reporting, 
the Audit committee considers there was no requirement for an internal audit function at this time. 

As  part  of  the  Group  Financial  Director’s  review  processes  the  divisional  Managing  Directors  and  the  site  Financial 
Controllers are obliged to positively confirm, quarterly, that the agreed procedures are in place and are being adhered 
to, with specific reference to key controls such as bank and control account reconciliations. 

It  has  been  reviewed  by  the  Committee  and  they  remain  satisfied  with  the  arrangements.  No  significant  failings  or 
weaknesses were identified by the internal management review and sign off process, but several minor improvements 
were identified and implemented. 

The Committee also considers the discharge of the Board’s responsibilities in the areas of corporate governance, financial 
reporting and internal control, including the internal management of risk, as identified in the FRC’s revised guidance on 
Guidance on Risk Management, Internal Control and Related Financial and Business Reporting. 

Risk management activities are dealt with in more detail in the Strategic Report on pages 12 to 16. 

Internal control 

The Audit Committee reviews the effectiveness of the Group’s system of internal controls and risk management activities 
bi-annually as part of the half year end and full year public reporting. 

The key procedures that the Directors have established with a view to providing effective internal control include the 
following: 

a clearly defined organisational structure and delegated limits of authority; 

• 
•  Group policies and procedures in respect of financial reporting and control, contract approval, project appraisal, 
human  resources,  quality  control,  health  and  safety,  information  security  and  corporate  governance  and 
compliance; 
the preparation of annual budgets and regular forecasts which are approved by the Board; 
the  monitoring  of  performance  against  budget  and  forecasts  and  the  reporting  of  any  variances  in  a  timely 
manner to the Board; 
regular  review  and  self-assessment  of  the  risks  to  which  the  Group  is exposed,  taking  steps  to monitor  and 
mitigate these wherever possible; 

• 
• 

• 

•  where appropriate, taking out insurance cover; and, 
• 

approval by the Audit Committee of audit plans and, on behalf of the Board, receipt of reports on the Group’s 
accounting and financial reporting practices and its internal controls together with reports from the external 
auditors as part of their normal audit work. 

P Haining FCA  
Audit Committee Chairman 
30 June 2020 

45 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT 

On  behalf  of  the  Board,  it is my  pleasure  to  present  our  Directors’  Remuneration  Report (the  “Report”) for  the  year 
ended 31 March 2020. I succeeded Mr A B Frere as Chair of the Remuneration Committee in July 2019 when I joined the 
Board. As we announced previously Tony retired from the Board on the 31 March 2020, I would like to thank him for his 
support and wish him well for the future.  

The  approach  that  we  have  adopted  in  reviewing  the  Company’s  remuneration  policy  for  Executive  Directors  is  to 
motivate, retain and, when necessary, attract executive management of the right calibre.  

To  do  this,  we  provide  packages  which  reflect  individual  experience  and  performance  and  take  into  account  the 
remuneration paid by companies of a similar size and complexity to Solid State PLC. 

During the year, the Committee completed a comprehensive review of the Company’s remuneration policy, and in this 
report I have set out the updated revised policy incorporating a number of changes from the previous policy, in order to 
move towards adopting best practice, to improve the competitiveness of remuneration packages and to further enhance 
stakeholder alignment. 

In determining the remuneration packages for the Executive Directors for the forthcoming financial year, the Committee 
took into account the following factors: 

• 

The Group’s overall performance and strategy - in particular, the Committee noted the strong organic growth 
in profitability, value enhancing acquisitions, and record trading of Solid-State PLC for the year ended 31 March 
2020; 

•  Current and emerging market practice; 
•  Best practice expectations of institutional investors; and 
• 

The competitiveness of the Company’s remuneration – the Committee looked both at other companies in the 
AIM and SmallCap index as well as a set of comparators that have similar complexities to Solid State PLC. 

The Committee’s conclusion was that the current structure was reasonable however it did need to be updated to ensure 
that  it  is  fit  for  purpose  going  forward.  The  updates  ensure  it  remains  simple  and  consistent,  with  pay  outcomes 
dependent upon performance linked to our business strategy.  

All decisions made by the Committee have been made under the updated Group Remuneration Policy. 

Basic  salary  increases  for  the  forthcoming  year  have  been  determined  by  reference  to  an  externally  produced 
benchmarking  survey  of  AIM  company  remuneration  published  in  April  2019.    The  Committee  concluded  that  it  is 
appropriate to increase basic salaries by an amount slightly higher than the general rate of salary inflation to reflect our 
intention to transition from lower quartile levels prevailing previously, towards median levels of pay. 

Accordingly, increases have been determined as follows: 

•  Group Chief Executive – 5.7% 
•  Group Chief Financial Officer – 11.5% 
•  Divisional Managing Directors – 6.7% 

The Committee is mindful that the salary of the Group Chief Executive remains below the median comparator level, and 
has undertaken to carry out a further review in October 2020. 

In  addition  to  basic  pay,  the  Committee  reviewed  its  policy  in  relation  to  annual  bonus  entitlements,  which  have 
previously been entirely discretionary. The outcome of this review has determined that an annual bonus pool should be 
set aside based upon a reasonable share of the excess of any profits earned over the market expectation at the beginning 
of each year. This will be set such that: 

1.  no bonus accrues until the company meets or exceeds expectation (after bonus cost); 
2. 
the cost of the scheme would not normally exceed one third of the excess profits; and, 
3.  aggregate allocations from the pool (set at the discretion of the Committee at the end of each year) would not 

normally exceed 50% of aggregate basic salaries. 

46 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

Business performance and resulting remuneration outcomes for the year ending 31 March 2020 

It has been a record year for the Company and for Shareholders. Solid State PLC has continued to deliver strong results 
for Shareholders: trading for the year ended 31 March 2020 was strong across both divisions and the Group has delivered 
full-year earnings which are 34% ahead of the market expectations from the beginning of the year. 

There were several achievements which we expect to build value over the longer term. You can read more detail in the 
Strategic Report on pages 6 to 21 but some of the highlights are summarised below: 

Strong growth in sales, orders, profits and earnings 

• 
•  Organic growth driven by strong performance from the Manufacturing division 
• 
• 

Further good progress on key strategic and performance targets 
Successful  progress  in  integrating  the  Pacer  Opto-electronics  BU in  to the VAD  division  while  increasing  the 
divisional EBIT return to 5.9% 

•  Record year-end order book of £39.9m  

Considering this performance, the Committee decided to award discretionary annual bonus payments to each of the 
executive Directors’ equivalent to 85% of basic salary. The level of bonus is significantly higher than the relatively nominal 
levels declared in previous years, and above the long term limits set in the new scheme.  This reflects the view of the 
Committee that the current year performance has indeed been exceptionally strong. 

It  has  been  particularly  pleasing  to  see continued  recognition  of  the long-term  strategic  progress  being made  by  the 
Company. This resulted in full vesting of the EMI Share plan awards granted in 1 June 2017.  

Further details of bonus and EMI awards can be found on page 58 of this report.  

Share Option incentives 

The Committee also recognise the benefits of implementing a long term reward for the executive through an LTIP. This 
is intended to encourage retention and motivation of executive Directors and other key members of the management 
team through building an equity investment in the company aligned to the generation of long term shareholder value. 

Detailed proposals are underway to design and implement two new share option plans; a HMRC approved Company 
Share  Option  Plan  (“CSOP”)  and  an  unapproved  Long  Term  Incentive  Plan  (“LTIP”)  offering  opportunities  to  build 
meaningful equity stakes in the Company for approximately 12 – 15 key employees, including the executive Directors. 
These plans will operate in manner consistent with relevant Investment Association’s guidelines, including, for example, 
a limit to dilution as a consequence of aggregate awards of 10% over a ten year period. 

Investor  consultations will  be  carried  out in  due  course,  and  these proposals will  be  put  before  the  Company  at  the 
forthcoming AGM. 

The first awards are expected to be made after the approval at the AGM of the updated remuneration policy at the AGM 
with subsequent awards being awarded annually.  

47 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

Other key activities in the year ending 31 March 2020 

During  the  year  under  review,  the  Committee  held  six  formal  meetings.  As  well  as  the  implementation  of  the 
remuneration policy, the Committee also carried out the following activities: 

•  Reviewed and approved the Executive Directors’ performance against financial and non-financial objectives for 
the year ended 31 March 2020 and the 2017 EMI Share plan targets and determined the bonuses payable; 
•  Reviewed and approved the increase in contractual notice periods of Mr P O James and Mr M T Richards from 

three to twelve months to bring them in line with the other Executive Directors;  

•  Determined salary increases for Executive Directors for the year ending 31 March 2021; 
•  Approved the LTIP Awards to be made in the year ending 31 March 2021 and their performance conditions; 
•  Reviewed and approved the annual bonus structure for Executive Directors for the year ending 31 March 2021; 
•  Reviewed and approved the payment of vehicle allowances in lieu of company cars; 
• 
• 
• 
•  Updated the terms of reference of the Committee. 

Establish a new HMRC approved CSOP plan which will be available to senior staff and executives; 
Establish a new LTIP plan which replaces the 2017 EMI Share plan which concluded on 31 March 2020; 
Implemented a deferred bonus scheme, in line with the Company’ remuneration policy; and 

Further  detail  on  the  above  can  be  found  in  the  Annual  Report  on  Remuneration.  During  2021,  the  Committee  will 
continue to review the reward arrangements appropriate to Executive Directors. 

The Annual Report on Remuneration explains how our policy has been updated and implemented during the year and, 
along with this letter, will be subject to an advisory vote at our AGM (resolution 2). We hope that you will support this 
resolution. 

N Rogers 
Remuneration Committee Chairman 
30 June 2020 

48 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

Single page remuneration summary 

Corporate performance for the year 

Remuneration principles 

The key principles of our approach to executive remuneration are to attract, retain and motive high calibre executives 
with the skills, experience, and vision to deliver outstanding company performance, while recognising the need to be 
cost effective. The aim is to incentivise the executives to deliver against the Solid State PLC business plans and budgets 
as part of progressing the longer term strategy of sustainable growth of the business by aligning executive remuneration 
to the Solid State PLC strategic goals and objectives which underpin delivering value for all stakeholders. 

Executive Director Total Remuneration 

49 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
    
            
 
 
    
            
 
    
            
 
 
    
            
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

Remuneration report 

This  report  is  prepared  to  address  the  reporting  requirements  of  the  QCA  code  which  the  company  has  adopted  in 
accordance with AIM rule 26. 

Remuneration Committee 

The  Company’s remuneration  policy  is  the  responsibility  of  the Remuneration  Committee (the  ‘Rem  Co’),  which was 
established in 2017.The terms of reference of the Rem Co are outlined on the Group website:www.solidstateplc.com.  

The members of the Committee are: Mr N Rogers (Chairman); and, Mr P Haining; Mr A B Frere was a member of the 
member of the committee up until his retirement on 31 March 2020. 

The Rem Co, which is required to meet at least twice a year, met six times during the year ended 31 March 2020. The 
Chief Executive Officer and certain executives may be invited to attend meetings of the Committee to assist it with its 
deliberations, but no executive is present when his or her own remuneration is discussed. 

During the year the Committee has sought independent advice relating to the design of the new LTIP from RSM.As set 
out  in  the  terms  of  reference  the committee  are  able  to  seek independent  advice  when it is  required  at  the  Groups 
expense. 

Refreshed remuneration policy 

In reviewing the remuneration policy, the committee has refreshed the policy as set out below.  

Remuneration element 
and link to strategy 

Operation  

Opportunity 

Performance metrics 

Base Salary – To 
attract and retain 
quality executives 
which provides a 
competitive total 
package 

Benefits 

To help retain 
employees and remain 
competitive in the 
marketplace. 

Pension 

To facilitate long-term 
savings provisions. 

Salaries are reviewed annually and 
normally fixed for 12 months, 
effective from 1 April. 

The Committee considers: 

• 

• 

Role, competence and 
performance; 
Average change in broader 
workforce pay; and,  

•  Group salary budgets. 
In future salaries will also 
benchmarked against companies of 
a comparable size and complexity 
which operate, in similar sectors. 

Directors, along with other senior 
UK executives, receive a company 
car or car allowance, life assurance, 
and family medical insurance. 

The Company operates a defined 
contribution pension scheme. 
Contributions are benchmarked 
periodically against companies of a 
comparable size and complexity 
which operate in similar sectors. 

Executive Directors may take a cash 
allowance in lieu of pension 
contributions. 

N/A 

Any percentage increases 
will ordinarily be in line 
with those across the 
wider workforce. 

However, salary increases 
may be higher in 
exceptional circumstances, 
such as the need to retain 
a critical executive, or an 
increase in the scope of 
the executive’s role 
(including promotion to a 
more senior role) and/or in 
the size of the Group. 

Insurance cover based on 
market rates. 

N/A 

Up to 4% of base salary in 
addition to an employee 
contribution of 5%. 

N/A 

50 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
Remuneration element 
and link to strategy 

Operation  

Opportunity 

Performance metrics 

Annual bonus 

The principal long-
term measure of 
Shareholder interests 
is Total Shareholder 
Return. 

The Committee 
considers that this will 
be enhanced through 
the setting and 
attainment of various 
short-term targets, 
which are within the 
control of the 
Executive Directors.  

These are incentivised 
through the bonus 
plan which rewards 
the achievement of 
annual financial and 
strategic business 
targets. 

Targets (financial and non-financial) 
are determined and reviewed by 
the Committee annually and are 
selected to be relevant for the year 
in question. 

Up to 100% of salary 
payable for significant 
over-achievement of 
financial and non-financial 
bonus objectives. 

The bonus will pay 0% at 
minimum threshold, and 
50% at excepted 
maximum.  In exceptional 
circumstances, the 
Committee has discretion 
to declare additional bonus 
up to a maximum of 100%. 

Actual bonus payable is determined 
by the Committee after the 
financial year-end, based on 
performance against these targets. 

Financial objectives are updated to 
reflect acquisitions, disposals and 
currency movements during the 
year. 

Bonus payments are delivered in 
cash or shares. Clawback (of any 
bonus paid) may be applied during 
employment or for 1 year post-
termination in the event of gross 
misconduct, material financial 
misstatement, error in calculation 
of outcomes or in any other 
circumstance that the 
Remuneration Committee 
considers appropriate. 

Performance is assessed on an 
annual basis against financial and 
personal / strategic objectives set 
at the start of each year.  

Financial measures will be 
weighted appropriately each year 
according to business priorities, 
and will represent no less than 
70% of the annual bonus.   

Performance vs. targeted levels 
will be measured at budgeted FX 
rates.  

Financial measures may include 
(but are not limited to) PBT and 
Adj FD EPS. Non-financial 
measures may include strategic 
measures directly linked to the 
Company’s priorities. 

Personal/strategic objectives will 
represent no more than 30% of 
the bonus and will be set annually 
to capture expected individual 
contributions to Solid State PLCs 
strategic plan.   

The personal element shall not 
pay out unless financial 
performance is at least at 
Threshold.  

The Remuneration Committee 
has discretion to adjust formulaic 
bonus outcomes to ensure 
fairness for shareholders and 
participants, to ensure pay aligns 
underlying company 
performance, and to avoid 
unintended outcomes.   

These adjustments can be either 
upwards (within plan limits) or 
downwards (including down to 
zero).  

The Remuneration Committee 
may consider measures outside 
of the bonus framework to 
ensure there is no reward for 
failure. 

51 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
Remuneration element 
and link to strategy 

Operation  

Opportunity 

Performance metrics 

Performance metrics reflect 
strategic goals and milestones. 

The exercise of the award is 
dependent upon the individual’s 
continued employment for a 
three-year period from the date 
of grant, subject to the good and 
bad leaver provisions within the 
Plan rules and the satisfaction by 
the Company of certain 
performance conditions over the 
three-year vesting period. 

The performance conditions are 
based on Group financial 
performance, which may include 
(but not be limited to) Group 
earnings or returns over the 
performance period. 

The Company’s share schemes 
are funded through a 
combination of shares purchased 
in the market and newly issued 
shares, as appropriate. 

Performance metrics reflect 
strategic goals and milestones. 

The exercise of the award is 
dependent upon the individual’s 
continued employment for a 
three-year period from the date 
of grant, subject to the good and 
bad leaver provisions within the 
Plan rules and the satisfaction by 
the Company of certain 
performance conditions over the 
three-year vesting period. 

The performance conditions are 
based on Group financial 
performance, which may include 
(but not be limited to) Group 
earnings or returns over the 
performance period. 

The Company’s share schemes 
are funded through a 
combination of shares purchased 
in the market and newly issued 
shares, as appropriate. 

Awards of up to the 
applicable HMRC approved 
limits 

Company Share Option 
Plan (CSOP) 

To motivate senior 
staff and executives to 
deliver shareholder 
value over the longer 
term. 

Awards of conditional shares 
through market price options are 
typically granted annually, with 
vesting dependent on the 
achievement of performance 
conditions over the following three 
years. 

Dividend equivalents will be paid 
on vested awards. 

These awards will be made under 
an HMRC approved company share 
option plan (CSOP) to Senior staff 
and  Executive Directors, 

Malus and clawback applies to 
vested and unvested CSOP awards 
in the event of material 
misstatement of information or 
misconduct. 

The Company monitors the number 
of shares issued under the schemes 
and their impact on dilution limits. 

The Company is committed to 
remaining within the Investment 
Association’s 10% dilution limit. 

Long Term Incentive 
Plan 

To motivate executives 
to deliver shareholder 
value over the longer 
term. 

Awards of conditional shares 
through nil-cost options are 
typically granted annually, with 
vesting dependent on the 
achievement of performance 
conditions over the following three 
years. 

Up to 125% of salary. 

Vested awards are subject to a 
two-year holding period, in 
aggregate a five-year period from 
award to exercise. 

Dividend equivalents will be paid 
on vested awards. 

These awards will be made under 
an unapproved share option plan 
(USOP) to Executive Directors, 

Malus and clawback applies to 
vested and unvested LTIP awards in 
the event of material misstatement 
of information or misconduct. 

The Company monitors the number 
of shares issued under the schemes 
and their impact on dilution limits. 

The Company is committed to 
remaining within the Investment 
Association’s 10% dilution limit. 

52 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

Details of the policy on fees paid to the Company’s Non-Executive Directors are set out in the table below: 

Performance 
metrics 

N/A 

Remuneration 
and link to strategy 

element 

Operation  

Opportunity 

Fees to attract and retain 
Non-Executive Directors 
of the highest calibre 
with broad commercial 
and other experience 
relevant to the Company. 

The fees paid to the Non 
Executive Directors are 
determined by the Board 
(excluding the Non-Executive 
Directors or group of Non 
Executive Directors whose 
remuneration is being 
discussed).  

Fee levels are benchmarked 
against similar roles at 
comparable companies.  
Time commitment and 
responsibility are considered 
when reviewing fee levels. 

Fee levels are reviewed annually, with any 
adjustments effective 1 April in the year following 
review. It is expected that increases to Non-
Executive Director fee levels will normally be in 
line with salaried employees over the life of this 
policy.  However, in the event that there is a 
material misalignment with market, or a material 
change in the time commitment required to fulfil a 
Non-Executive Director role, the Board has the 
power to make an appropriate adjustment to the 
fee level. 

Notes to the remuneration policy and performance conditions and target setting 

Each year, the Committee will determine the weightings, performance metrics and targets as well as timing of grants 
and payments for the annual bonus, CSOP and LTIP plans within the approved remuneration policy and relevant plan 
rules.  

The Committee evaluates a number of factors which assist in reaching their conclusions and view. These include, but are 
not limited to, the strategic priorities for the Company over the mid/long term, Shareholder feedback, the risk profile of 
the business and the macroeconomic climate. 

The  Annual  Bonus  Scheme  is  measured  against  a  balance  of  profitability,  and  the  delivery  of  key  strategic  areas  of 
importance  for  the  business.  The  profitability  metrics  used  include  adjusted  profit  before  tax  and  /or  adjusted  fully 
diluted EPS. 

The CSOP and LTIP are assessed against a performance measure identified as the most relevant to driving sustainable 
bottom line business performance, as well as providing value for Shareholders. This measure is currently considered to 
be real growth in adjusted fully diluted EPS. 

Targets are set against the annual and long-term plans, taking into account analysts’ forecasts, the Company’s strategic 
plans,  prior  year  performance,  estimated vesting levels  and  the  affordability  of  pay  arrangements.  Targets  are  set  to 
provide an appropriate balance of risk and reward to ensure that, while being motivational for participants, maximum 
payments are only made for exceptional performance. 

In exceptional circumstances, the Committee has the discretion to adjust and/or set different targets and performance 
conditions for annual bonus and long term incentive plans, provided the new conditions are no tougher or easier than 
the original conditions. This includes events where conditions are unable to fulfil their original intended purpose. Awards 
may also be adjusted in certain circumstances (e.g. for a rights issue, a corporate restructuring or for special dividends). 

Any  discretion  exercised  by  the  Committee  in  the  adjustment  of  performance  conditions  will  be  fully  explained  to 
Shareholders in the relevant report. If the discretion is material and upwards, the Committee will consult with major 
Shareholders in advance. No such discretion was exercised during FY19/20. 

The  Committee  also  has  the  ability  to  grant  additional  LTIP  awards  to  participants  in  return  for  their  bearing  the 
Company’s liability to employer’s National Insurance arising on the exercise of such grants made to them above. The 
additional award ensures that the participants are in a neutral position on an after-tax basis, assuming no change in tax 
rates. 

All historical awards that have been granted before the date this policy came into effect and still remain outstanding 
(including those detailed on page 58 of this report) remain eligible to vest based on their original award terms. 

53 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

Recruitment (and appointment) policy 

The remuneration package for a new Executive Director would be set in accordance with the terms of the Company’s 
approved  remuneration  policy  in  force  at  the  time  of  appointment.  The  same  approach  would  be  adopted  where  a 
Director is promoted to the Board from within the Group. 

Element 

Base salary 

Pension  

Benefits 

Annual Bonus 

Recruitment Policy 

The base salaries of new appointees will be determined by reference to relevant market data, experience 
and skills of the individual, internal relativities, and current basic salary.  Where new appointees have 
initial basic salaries set below market, any shortfall may be managed with phased increases over multiple 
years subject to the individual’s development in the role. 

New appointees will receive pension contributions or an equivalent cash supplement in line with existing 
policy. 

New  appointees will be  eligible  to  receive benefits  which  may  include (but  are  not  limited to) those 
outlined in the policy table.   

The structure described  in the  policy  table  will  apply to  new  appointees  with the  relevant  maximum 
being pro-rated to reflect the proportion of employment over the year. Targets for the personal element 
will be tailored to each executive. 

LTIP 

New  appointees  will  be  granted  awards  under  the  LTIP  on  the  same  terms  as  other  executives,  as 
described in the policy table. 

In addition, a new recruit may be awarded up to 125% of salary in performance shares, which would be 
subject to the same performance measures and rules in force for the LTIPs at the time of appointment. 

Compensation for 
forfeited remuneration 

The approach in respect of compensation for forfeited remuneration in respect of a previous employer 
will be considered on a case-by-case basis taking into account all relevant factors, such as performance 
achieved or likely to be achieved, the proportion of the performance period remaining and the form of 
the award. 

The Committee retains the ability to make use of the relevant guidance to facilitate the “buyout”. Any 
“buy-out” awards would have a fair value no higher than the remuneration forfeited. 

Notice period and payment for loss of office 

It is the Company’s policy that Executive Directors should have service contracts incorporating a notice period of one 
year. However, it may be necessary occasionally to offer shorter or longer initial notice periods to new Directors. 

Under the terms of their service contracts, any termination payments are not pre-determined but are determined in 
accordance with the Director’s contractual rights, taking account of the circumstances and the Director’s duty to mitigate 
loss. The Company’s objective is to manage its exposure to the risk of a potential termination payment. 

Non-Executive Directors have letters of appointment for a term of one year whereupon they are normally renewed, but 
generally for no more than nine years in aggregate. Non-Executive Directors are not eligible for payment on termination, 
other than payment to the end of their contracts. 

54 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

Service contracts and letters of appointment 

The Executive Directors have entered into service agreements which can be terminated by either party by providing the 
required notice period set out in their respective service contracts. 

The Chairman and Non-Executive Directors have entered into letters of appointment for an initial fixed period up to the 
first AGM where in accordance with the Article of Association they are re-elected by the shareholders. Subsequently in 
accordance with the Article of Association all Directors are required to stand for re-election by rotation at the AGM on a 
three year cycle. The appointment can be terminated on six months’ notice by either party. 

P Haining 
G S Marsh 
P O James  
M T Richards 
J L Macmichael  
N Rogers 

Interim Chair and Non-Executive Director  
Group Chief Executive 
Group Finance Director 
Manufacturing MD 
Value Added Distribution MD 
Non-Executive Director 

External appointments 

Date of contract / letter 
of appointment 
31/10/2017 
19/06/1996 
18/11/2016 
06/04/2016 
26/05/2010 
19/06/2019 

Expiry of current term 

September 2022 
12 months by either party 
12 months by either party 
12 months by either party 
12 months by either party 
September 2022 

With the approval of the Board in each case, and subject to the overriding requirements of the Group, Executive Directors 
may accept external appointments as Non-Executive Directors of other companies and retain any fees received.   

During the year ended 31 March 2020, the Executive Directors did not hold any Non-Executive Directorships with other 
companies  other  than  Mr  P  O  James  who  on  a  voluntary  basis  is  a  Non-Executive  Director  for  the  British  Waterski 
Federation Limited. 

LTIP and Bonus leaver provisions 

Reason for leaving 
Annual bonus 
Resignation  
Good leaver / Change of control 

LTIP 
Resignation  

Good leaver / Change of control 

Calculation of vesting / payment 

No annual bonus payable 
Cash bonuses will typically be paid to the extent that performance objectives have been 
met.  Any resulting bonus will typically be prorated for time worked.  The Remuneration 
Committee retains discretion to vary this treatment in individual circumstances. 

Outstanding awards would normally lapse however the committee has the discretion to 
approve vesting based on a pro-rata time apportionment and assessment of achievement 
of performance conditions. 
The Committee determines whether and to what extent outstanding awards vest based 
on the extent to which performance conditions have been achieved. The Remuneration 
Committee retains discretion to vary this treatment in individual circumstances.  

The determination of vesting will be made as soon as reasonably practical following the 
end of the performance period or such earlier date as the Remuneration Committee may 
agree (within 12 months in the event of death). 

In the event of change of control, the following 3 years’ awards will vest on a pro-rata 
time  apportionment  and  assessment  of  achievement  of  performance  conditions  as  a 
minimum.  Any award above this level will be at the committee’s discretion. For the initial 
awards under the LTIP there are transitional provisions applicable. 

In  the  event  of  a  change  of  control,  awards  may  alternatively  be  exchanged  for  new 
equivalent awards in the acquirer by mutual agreement where appropriate. 

A Good leaver is defined as a participant ceasing to be employed by the Group by reason of death, disability, ill health, 
retirement, or any other reason that the Committee determines in its absolute discretion. 

55 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

Consideration of employment conditions elsewhere in the Group 

The remuneration policy, which has been implemented for the current Executive Directors, is more weighted towards 
performance-related pay than for other employees. The reason for this is to establish a clear link between remuneration 
received by the Executive Directors and the creation of Shareholder value. 

As mentioned on page 50 of this Annual Report and Accounts, when setting the policy, the Committee takes account of 
pay  and  employment  conditions  elsewhere  in  the  Group,  but  has  not  used  any  remuneration  comparison  measures 
between the Executive Directors and other employees. 

Consideration of Shareholder views 

The  Committee’s  policy  is  to  receive  updates  on  the  views  of  Shareholders  and  their  representative  bodies  on  best 
practice  and  take  these  into  account. It  seeks  the  views  of  key  Shareholders  on matters  of  remuneration in  which  it 
believes they would be interested. 

Adoption of the refreshed policy for 2021 

In  addition  to reviewing  and  refreshing  the  policy to  adopt  best  practice,  the committee  has  reviewed  the  Executive 
remuneration for the coming year. The results of this review have been set out in this report. 

(i) Executive remuneration 
The previous full salary and benefit review took effect from 1 April 2017 an interim salary review was completed during 
2018/19,  as  a result  it  was  appropriate  that  a  full  review of  salaries  and  performance  bonuses  should  be completed 
ahead of the end of financial year ended 31 March 2020. This review has taken into account the refreshed Policy, the 
Group  performance,  individual  performance  and 
internal  relativities  in  addition  to  independently  reviewing 
remuneration against appropriate benchmarking. 

The impact of the review of salaries and bonuses was as follows: 

31 March 2020 

G S Marsh 
P O James 
J L Macmichael 
M T Richards  

1 April 2018 to 
31 March 2019 
Salary pa 
(£’000) 
163 
120 
140 
140 
______ 

1 April 2019 to 
31 March 2020 
Salary pa 
(£’000) 
175 
130 
150 
150 
______ 

From 1 April 
2020 
Salary pa 
(£’000) 
185 
145 
160 
160 
______ 

1 April 2018 to 
31 March 2019 
 Bonus (£’000) 

1 April 2019 to 
31 March 2020 
 Bonus (£’000) 

Nil 
20 
20 
15 
______ 

149 
111 
128 
128 
______ 

Directors’ remuneration for the year ended 31 March 2020 is set out on page 58 of this document. 

(ii) Chairman and Non-Executive Director remuneration 
The  Chairman  and  the  Non-Executive  Directors  receive  a  fixed  fee  set  out  in  the  table  below.  The  fixed  fee  covers 
preparation for and attendance at meetings of the full Board and committees thereof.  Should there be any services 
provided in relation to “special projects” that may arise there may be an appropriate incremental fee agreed for these 
services. 

The Executive Directors are responsible for setting the level of Non-Executive remuneration. The Non-Executive Directors 
are also reimbursed for all reasonable expenses incurred in attending meetings. 

The Non-Executive Directors are not eligible to participate in the Company’s performance related bonus plan or long 
term incentive plans.  Full terms and conditions for each of the Non-Executive Directors are available at the Company’s 
registered office during normal business hours and will be available upon request at the AGM for 15 minutes prior to the 
meeting and during the meeting. 

56 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

(iii) Equity-based incentive schemes for 2020 
The  Committee  strongly  believes that  equity-based  incentive  schemes increase  the  focus  of  employees in improving 
Group performance, whilst at the same time providing a strong incentive for retaining and attracting individuals of a high 
calibre. 

Enterprise Management incentive scheme (‘EMI’) 
The  Solid  State  plc  Enterprise  Management  Incentive  Scheme  (‘EMI’),  comprising  conditional  (performance-related) 
share awards (technically structured as nominal cost options pursuant to which participants must pay 0.1p per share on 
the exercise of their awards). 

No EMI awards were made in 2018/19 or 2019/20. The last grant was made in June 2017. 

All awards  will lapse  at  the end  of  the  applicable  performance  period  to the  extent  that  the  applicable  performance 
criteria conditions have not been satisfied with no opportunity for retesting. In the event of a good leaver event or a 
change of control of the Company, the EMI awards may vest early, but only to the extent that, in the opinion of the 
Committee, the performance conditions have been satisfied at that time. The awards will generally also be subject to a 
time pro-rated reduction to reflect the reduced period of time between the grant of the awards and the time of vesting, 
although this reduction may not be applied in certain cases. 

There were 48,000 EMI options awarded to each Director in June 2017. These options vest in three equal tranches based 
on performance conditions in respect of each year ending 31 March 2018, 31 March 2019, and 31 March 2020. 

The 2017 EMI awards are subject to two performance conditions. Firstly, the executive must remain in post at the vesting 
date, secondly the options fully vest based on exceeding the board approved budget by 25%. Vesting commences for 
performance in excess of the board approved budget with the options vesting pro-rata on a straight-line basis up to 25% 
above the board approved budget where the awards fully vest. The market value at the date of grant was £4.23. 

Awards that do not vest as a result of not meeting the performance criteria in any particular year lapse. 

New CSOP for 2021 and beyond 

For  2021,  normal  CSOP  awards  of  up  to  the  HMRC  tax  approved levels  of  £30,000 may  be made  to  senior  staff  and  
Executive Directors, as outlined in the Policy Table. For all participants, awards will vest after three years in accordance 
with the performance conditions applicable to each grant. The performance conditions will be determined and set by 
the  remuneration  committee  in  accordance  with  the  remuneration  policy.  No  award  will  vest  below  Threshold 
performance, and vesting will increase on a straight-line basis between Threshold, Target and Stretch. 

New LTIP for 2021 and beyond 

For 2021, normal LTIP awards of up to 125% of salary may be made to Executive Directors, as outlined in the Policy Table.  
For all participants, awards will vest after three years in accordance with the performance conditions applicable to each 
grant. The performance conditions will be determined and set by the remuneration committee in accordance with the 
remuneration policy.  No award will vest below Threshold performance, and vesting will increase on a straight-line basis 
between Threshold, Target and Stretch.   

For the first year of adoption of the refreshed remuneration policy the remuneration committee intends to make a share 
option award in the range of 50% to 75% of salary which will be granted subsequent to the AGM when the shareholders 
will vote on the adoption of the scheme, and participate in an advisory vote at the forthcoming AGM (resolutions 2, 10 
and 11).  

Once  this revised  policy  has  been  put  to  the  AGM  in  subsequent  years  the  remuneration  committee  intend  to  make 
annual awards in accordance with the Policy principles at the beginning of the financial year. 

57 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

Remuneration for 31 March 2020 – (Information subject to audit) 

The value of all elements of remuneration received by each Director in the year was as follows: 

31 March 2020 

G S Marsh 
P O James 
J L Macmichael 
M T Richards  
A B Frere 
N Rogers* 
P Haining  
J M Lavery** 

Total 

Salary/ 
Fees 
£’000 
175 
130 
150 
150 
12 
23 
12 
5 
______ 
657 
______ 

Consultant 
fees 
£’000 
- 
- 
- 
- 
51 
- 
13 
5 
______ 
69 
______ 

EMI share 
bonus*** 
£’000 
61 
61 
61 
61 
- 
- 
- 
- 
______ 
244 
______ 

Bonus 
**** 
£’000 
149 
111 
128 
128 
- 
- 
- 
- 
______ 
516 
______ 

Benefits 
in kind 
£’000 
35 
25 
31 
22 
- 
- 
- 
- 
______ 
113 
______ 

Pension 
Cont’n 
£’000 
7 
5 
6 
6 
- 
- 
- 
- 
______ 
24 
______ 

Single 
figure Total 
£’000 
427 
332 
376 
367 
63 
23 
25 
10 
______ 
1,623 
______ 

 *Mr N Rogers was appointed on 1 July 2019 as such his annual fee of £30,000 has been charged pro-rata. 

**Mr J M Lavery retired on 31 August 2019 as such his annual fee of £12,000 has been charged pro-rata. 

*** 16,000 EMI share bonus options vested in relation to the financial year ended 31 March 2020 performance. The valuation of these options included 
in the single figure total remuneration above is based on the 31 March 2020 share price of £3.84. 

**** All Bonuses including the Director bonuses have been accrued however  payment was deferred  until the  end  of  Q1 where comfort  had  been 
obtained over the cash impact of COVID-19 had been assessed and it was appropriate to pay the bonuses earned in respect of FY19/20 performance. 

31 March 2019 

G S Marsh 
P O James 
J L Macmichael 
M T Richards  
A B Frere 
P Haining  
J M Lavery  

Total 

Salary/ 
Fees 
£’000 
163 
120 
140 
140 
12 
12 
12 
______ 
599 
______ 

Consultant 
Fees 
£’000 
- 
- 
- 
- 
51 
13 
13 
______ 
77 
______ 

EMI share 
bonus* 
£’000 
61 
61 
61 
61 
n/a 
n/a 
n/a 
______ 
244 
______ 

Cash 
 Bonus 
£’000 
- 
20 
20 
15 
n/a 
n/a 
n/a 
______ 
55 
______ 

Benefits 
in kind 
£’000 
35 
27 
29 
34 
- 
- 
1 
______ 
126 
______ 

Pension 
Cont’n 
£’000 
8 
2 
4 
3 
- 
- 
- 
______ 
17 
______ 

Single 
figure total 
£’000 
267 
230 
254 
253 
63 
25 
26 
______ 
1,118 
______ 

* 16,000 EMI share bonus options vested in relation to the financial year ended 31 March 2020 performance. The valuation of these options included 
in the single figure total remuneration above is based on the 31 March 2019 share price of £3.81  

The principal benefits in kind relate to the provision of company cars, fuel, and private healthcare. 

Of the current year share based payments charge £244k (2019: £241k) relates to the Directors. 

In addition to the above consultancy fees, additional fees totalling £42k (2019: £26k) arose during the year in respect of 
accountancy services and out of pocket expenses provided by The Kings Mill Practice, a firm of which Mr P Haining is the 
proprietor.  A balance of £9k (2019: £7k) was due to The Kings Mill Practice at 31 March 2020. 

In addition to the above, fees totalling £1k (2019: £2k) arose during the year in respect of out of pocket expenses and 
services of Mr A B Frere provided by Condev Limited a company where Mr A B Frere is the shareholder. A balance of £5k 
(2019: £5k) was due to Condev Limited at 31 March 2020. 

In addition to the above, fees totalling £nil (2019: £1k) arose during the year in respect of out of pocket expenses and 
services of Mr J M Lavery provided by John Lavery Consulting Limited a company where Mr J M Lavery is the shareholder. 
A balance of £nil (2019: £1k) was due to John Lavery Consulting Limited at 31 March 2020. 

58 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

The Directors’ interest in the issued ordinary share capital of the Company at  today’s date, at 31 March 2020 and 31 
March 2019 or date of appointment if later, were as follows: 

30 June 20 

31 March 20 

31 March 19 

G S Marsh 
J M Lavery* 
P Haining 
J L Macmichael 
A B Frere** 
M T Richards 
P O James 
N Rogers 

280,849 
n/a 
54,505 
122,373 
n/a 
7,475 
684 
4,400 

280,849 
n/a 
54,505 
122,373 
13,430 
7,475 
684 
4,400 

280,862 
118,393 
54,446 
122,337 
13,006 
4,800 
684 
- 

*retired from the Board on 31 August 2019 
** retired from the Board on 31 March 2020 

Enterprise Management incentive scheme (‘EMI’) 

Details of the options over the Company’s shares granted under the Enterprise Management Incentives Scheme are as 
follows: 

Options 
held at 
31.03.19 
32,000 

32,000 

32,000 

32,000 

Granted 
- 

Exercised 
16,000 

Lapsed 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

Options 
held at 
31.03.20 
16,000 

32,000 

32,000 

32,000 

- 

- 

- 

- 

Exercise 
price 

0.1p 

0.1p 

0.1p 

0.1p 

Date of 
grant 
01.06.17  April 2018 to April 2027 

Exercise  
period 

01.06.17  April 2018 to April 2027 

01.06.17  April 2018 to April 2027 

01.06.17  April 2018 to April 2027 

G S Marsh 

P O James 

M T Richards 

J L Macmichael 

During the year, the performance criteria for the final tranche of the options was met and as such 16,000 shares vested 
of each Director’s options totalling 64,000 options. All the options held at the balance sheet date had vested, and none 
of these have been exercised post period end. 

Mr G S Marsh exercised and sold 16,000 options with an exercise price of 0.01p on the 13 January 2020 and sold them 
on the 16 January 2020 at a price of £6.35 resulting in net proceeds of £101,584. 

The market price of the shares at 31 March 2020 was £3.84 (2019: £3.81), with a quoted range during the year of £2.45 
to £6.75 (2019:£2.42 to £4.24). 

Options 
held at 
31.03.18 
32,000 

32,000 

32,000 

32,000 

Granted 
- 

Exercised 
- 

Lapsed 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

Options 
held at 
31.03.19 
32,000 

32,000 

32,000 

32,000 

- 

- 

- 

- 

Exercise 
price 

0.01p 

0.01p 

Date of 
grant 
01.06.17  April 2018 to April 2027 

Exercise  
period 

01.06.17  April 2018 to April 2027 

0.01p 

01.06.17  April 2018 to April 2027 

0.01p 

01.06.17  April 2018 to April 2027 

G S Marsh 

P O James 

M T Richards 

J L Macmichael 

During the year ended 31 March 2019 the performance criteria for the second tranche of the options was met and as 
such 16,000 shares vested of each Director’s options totalling 64,000 options.  

The  remaining  16,000  options  held  by  each  Director  have  performance  vesting  criteria  relating  to  the  financial 
performance for the year ending 31 March 2020. 

N Rogers 
Remuneration Committee Chairman 
30 June 2020 

59 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
DIRECTORS’ REPORT 

The  Directors  submit  their report  together with  the  audited  financial  statements  of  the  Group in  respect  of  the  year 
ended 31 March 2020.  

Principal Activities, Review of the Business and Future Developments  

The principal activities of the Group during the year continued to be those of the manufacturing of electronic equipment 
and the value added distribution of electronic components and materials. 

The key performance indicators recognised by management are set out in the KPI section of the strategic report on page 
19. 

An overall review of the Group’s trading performance and future developments is given in the Chairman’s Statement 
and Strategic Report. Other than as reported in the corporate and social responsibility section of this report the Group 
does not comment on environmental matters. 

Directors  
The Directors of the Company during the year were:  
P Haining, FCA 
G S Marsh  
J L Macmichael 
M T Richards  
P O James, BSc FCA 
N F Rogers (appointed 1 July 2019) 
A B Frere (resigned 31 March 2020) 
J M Lavery (resigned 31 August 2019) 

Details  of  the  interests  of  Directors  in  the  shares  of  the  Company  and  Directors’  service  contracts  are  stated  in  the 
Remuneration Committee Report on pages 46 to 59.  

Corporate Governance  

The Board confirms that the Group has had regard, throughout the accounting period, with the provisions set out in the 
Quoted  Companies  Alliance  (QCA)  Code  and  the  UK  Corporate  Governance  Code  which  was  issued  by  the  Financial 
Reporting Council in April 2016.  

Details of how the Group has adopted the QCA Code and corporate governance principles are set out in the corporate 
governance report on pages 25 to 40 

Internal Control  

Details of how the board has implemented its internal control framework and processes are set out in the corporate 
governance report on pages 25 to 40. 

Board of Directors  

The structure and operation of the Board of Directors is set out in the corporate governance report on pages 25 to 40. 

Principal risks and uncertainties  

Details of the principal risks and uncertainties of the Group are set out in the strategic report on pages 12 to 16. 

Financial Instruments  

Details of the use of financial instruments by the Group are contained in note 21 of the financial statements. 

Purchase of Own Shares  

At the year end the Company had in place authority to purchase up to 15% of the issued ordinary shares under authority 
given by a resolution at the Annual General Meeting on 4 September 2019. This authority expires on 4 March 2021. 

Dividends  

Details of the dividends are disclosed in note 9 and in the Chairman’s Statement on page 4. 

60 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
DIRECTORS’ REPORT (continued) 

Research and Development 

During  the  year  the  Group  has  continued  to  invest  in  research  and  development  in  partnership  with  some  of  its 
customers to develop technical electronic solutions to address the demand of our customers in  their core markets of 
electronic communications, mobile battery power and rugged and industrial computing. During the year we invested in 
excess of £1.3m (2019: £1.7m) in research and development. The Company continues to claim R&D tax credits where 
eligible.  

Share options award 

On 1 June 2017 the company granted options to the Executive Directors (who previously had no outstanding options) 
under the Company’s EMI Share bonus Plan, as detailed in the remuneration report on pages 46 to 59, note 28. 

Employee engagement 

Further details are set out in the corporate governance report on pages 25 to 40. 

Business relationships  

Further details are set out in the corporate governance report on pages 25 to 40. 

Going Concern  

Further details are set out in the corporate governance report on pages 25 to 40. 

Renewal of authority to purchase the Company’s shares and authorities to issue shares 

Last year, a resolution was passed at the Annual General Meeting to give the Company the authority to purchase its own 
Ordinary shares on the Stock Exchange.  This authority would expire after a period of eighteen months from the passing 
of the resolution.  In order to avoid this authority expiring during the next year and the need to call an extraordinary 
general meeting to renew the authority, a resolution to renew the authority is set out in the notice of the Annual General 
Meeting at the end of this document. 

Under the terms of the resolution to be proposed at the Annual General Meeting, the maximum number of shares which 
may  be  purchased  is  15%  of  the issued  Ordinary  share  capital  of  the  Company.   The minimum price  payable  by  the 
Company for its Ordinary shares will be 5p and the maximum price will be determined by reference to current market 
prices.  The  authority will  automatically  expire  after  a  period  of eighteen months  from  the  passing  of  the  resolution 
unless renewed. 

It is  not  the  Directors’  current  intention  to  exercise  the  power  to  purchase  the  Company’s  Ordinary  shares,  but  they 
believe that under certain circumstances it would be in the Company’s best interests to do so. 

Resolutions are also being proposed at the Annual General Meeting to issue further shares.  One resolution will authorise 
the company to issue new shares up to a third of the current issued share capital by way of a rights issue and the second 
resolution will authorise the company to issue new shares up to 10% of the current issued share capital without rights 
of pre-emption for existing shareholders, and to the extent that new shares are issued under the second resolution the 
limit on the first resolution will be reduced such that the total number of new shares issued cannot exceed one third of 
the current share capital. 

Your Directors consider that the resolutions to be proposed at the meeting are in the best interests of the Company and 
its shareholders.  They unanimously recommend that all Ordinary shareholders vote in favour of the resolution at the 
Annual General Meeting as they intend to do in respect of their beneficial holdings. 

61 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
DIRECTORS’ REPORT (continued) 

Peter Haining FCA, (dob: September 1956), Interim Chairman, Non-Executive Director and Company Secretary 
Peter Haining qualified as a chartered accountant in 1980 and later worked at Binder Hamlyn. He left Binder Hamlyn in 
1992, together with three colleagues, to establish The Kings Mill Partnership.  

Gary Marsh, (dob: April 1966), Chief Executive Officer 
Gary joined the Company in 1986 having gained an HND in Business and Finance Studies.  He has held various positions 
within the Group including that of Operations Director of Solid State Supplies prior to his appointment as its Managing 
Director in 1997.  In addition to this role, Gary was appointed Group Managing Director in 2002 following the acquisition 
of Steatite. In 2011 following the acquisition of Rugged Systems he was appointed as Group Chief Executive Officer. 

Peter James, (dob: June 1979), Director 
Peter qualified as a Chartered Accountant with PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP (PwC) in 2003. He was appointed to the 
Board of Solid State PLC in February 2017. Before joining Solid State PLC, Peter was Group Financial Controller at IQE plc 
where he was a key member of the senior leadership team successfully completing two significant transactions, funded 
through an equity fund raising and a global refinancing. Subsequently he led the integration project, aligning the enlarged 
Group  with  its customer markets  serviced  by manufacturing  sites,  delivering  efficiency  and material  savings.  At PwC 
Peter gained a wide range of experience in Audit and Financial Due Diligence advising a broad range of companies in a 
variety of sectors, including multinational main market and AIM listed companies. In addition, on a voluntary basis Peter 
is a Non-Executive Director for the British Water Ski and Wakeboard Federation Limited providing independent financial 
oversight as Chair of the Audit and Finance Committee. 

John Macmichael, (dob: April 1961), Director 
John is an electronics and communications graduate whose career has encompassed design and development through 
applications  engineering,  sales,  sales  management  and  general  business  management.  John  has  gained  extensive 
management  experience  of  multiple  sales  channels  with  distributors  and  OEMs  both  here  in  the  UK  and  worldwide 
through his international sales management role whilst living in the USA. Formerly managing  Director of Breckenridge 
Technologies Limited, John joined Solid State Supplies Limited in 2006 before being appointed managing Director in April 
2011. He presently runs the Value Added Distribution division on behalf of Solid State PLC. 

Matthew Richards, (dob: October 1963), Director 
Matthew was appointed as Managing Director of Steatite Limited in April 2016. Matthew comes to the Board with 30 
years  of  experience  in  the  defence  electronics  industry.  He  has  a  track  record  of  success  in  both  private  and  public 
companies, most recently as Senior Vice President and Managing Director at API Technologies Corp running operations 
in the UK, Canada and USA, specialising in RF and Security solutions with a focus on high reliability and harsh environment 
applications. Prior to that, Matthew held business development and sales leadership roles with the L3 Corporation. He 
has extensive experience dealing with the Government customers at home and abroad having travelled extensively in 
Europe,  the  Middle  East  and  Asia.  Matthew  started  his  career  installing  and  commissioning  terrestrial  and  satellite 
antennas systems for broadcast and military users before moving into sales in the early 1980s. 

Nigel Rogers  (dob: April 1961), Non-Executive Director (appointed 01 July 2019) 
Nigel qualified as a Chartered Accountant in 1983 with PwC. He became Group Finance Director of Stadium Group plc in 
1996, before progressing to Group Chief Executive Officer in 2001. He joined 600 Group plc as Group Chief Executive 
Officer in 2012 and led the turnaround of the AIM-quoted global machine tool business, increasing strategic focus on the 
growth of its laser marking business until leaving in April 2015 to begin a plural career. Nigel is also Chairman of Transense 
Technologies plc and Chairman of Surgical Innovations Group plc. 

62 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
DIRECTORS’ REPORT (continued) 

Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities  

The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report, Strategic Report, the Directors’ Report and the Group 
and parent company financial statements in accordance with applicable law and regulations. Company law requires the 
Directors to prepare Group and parent company financial statements for each financial year. As required by the AIM 
Rules of the London Stock Exchange they are required to prepare the Group financial  statements in accordance with 
IFRSs as adopted by the EU and applicable law and have elected to prepare the parent company financial statements in 
accordance with UK Accounting Standards and applicable law (UK Generally Accepted Accounting Practice), including 
FRS 102. Under company law the Directors must not approve the financial statements unless they are satisfied that they 
give a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the Group and parent company and of their profit or loss for that period. 
In preparing each of the Group and parent company financial statements, the Directors are required to: 

select suitable accounting policies and then apply them consistently; 

• 
•  make judgements and estimates that are reasonable and prudent; 
• 

for the Group financial statements, state whether they have been prepared in accordance with IFRSs as adopted 
by the EU; 
for  the  parent  company  financial  statements,  state  whether  applicable  UK  Accounting  Standards have  been 
followed, subject to any material departures disclosed and explained in the financial statements; and 
prepare the financial statements on the going concern basis unless it is inappropriate to presume that the Group 
and the parent company will continue in business. 

• 

• 

The  Directors  are  responsible  for  keeping  adequate  accounting  records  that  are  sufficient  to  show  and  explain  the 
Group’s  and  Company’s  transactions  and disclose  with  reasonable  accuracy  at  any  time  the  financial  position  of  the 
Group and Company to enable them to ensure that the financial statements comply with the Companies Act 2006 and 
Article 4 of the IAS Regulation. They are also responsible for safeguarding the assets of the Group and hence for taking 
reasonable  steps  for  the  prevention  and  detection  of  fraud  and  other  irregularities.  In  addition,  the  Directors  are 
responsible the maintenance and integrity of the corporate and financial information included in the Company’s website. 
Legislation in the UK governing the preparation and dissemination of financial statements may differ from legislation in 
other jurisdictions. 

Financial  statements  are  published  on  the  Group’s  website  in  accordance  with  legislation  in  the  United  Kingdom 
governing  the  preparation  and  dissemination  of  financial  statements,  which  may  vary  from  legislation  in  other 
jurisdictions. The maintenance and integrity of the corporate and financial information on the Group’s website is the 
responsibility  of  the  Directors.  The  Directors’  responsibility  also  extends  to  the  ongoing  integrity  of  the  financial 
statements contained therein. The work carried out by the auditors does not include consideration of the maintenance 
and the integrity of the website and accordingly the auditor accepts no responsibility for any changes that have occurred 
to the financial statements when they are presented on the website. 

Auditors  

Each of the persons who are Directors at the time when this Directors’ Report is approved has confirmed that: 

• 

• 

so far as that Director is aware, there is no relevant audit information of which the parent company’s auditors 
are unaware, and 
that  Director  has  taken  all  steps  that  ought  to  have  been  taken  as  a  Director  in  order  to  be  aware  of  any 
information needed by the auditors in connection with preparing their report and to establish that the parent 
company’s auditors are aware of that information. 

A resolution to re-appoint RSM UK Audit LLP as auditors will be proposed at the next annual general meeting. 

By order of the Board  

P Haining FCA  
Secretary  
30 June 2020 

Registered Office: 2 Ravensbank Business Park, Hedera Road, Redditch, B98 9EY 

63 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
REPORT OF THE INDEPENDENT AUDITORS 
TO THE SHAREHOLDERS OF SOLID STATE PLC 

Opinion 

We have audited the financial statements of Solid State plc (the ‘parent company’) and its subsidiaries (the ‘group’) for 
the year ended 31 March 2020 which comprise the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income, the Consolidated 
Statement of Changes in Equity, the Consolidated Statement of Financial Position, the Consolidated Statement of Cash 
Flows,  the  Company  Statement  of  Financial Position,  the  Company  Statement  of  Changes  in  Equity  and  notes  to  the 
financial statements, including a summary of significant accounting policies. The financial reporting framework that has 
been applied in the preparation of the group financial statements is applicable law and International Financial Reporting 
Standards (IFRSs) as adopted by the European Union. The financial reporting framework that has been applied in the 
preparation of the parent company financial statements is applicable law and United Kingdom Accounting Standards, 
including  Financial  Reporting  Standard  102  “The  Financial  Reporting  Standard  applicable  in  the  UK  and  Republic  of 
Ireland” (United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice). 

In our opinion:  

• 

• 

• 

• 

the financial statements give a true and fair view of the state of the group’s and of the parent company’s affairs 
as at 31 March 2020 and of the group’s profit for the year then ended; 

the  group  financial  statements  have  been  properly  prepared  in  accordance  with  IFRSs  as  adopted  by  the 
European Union; 

the  parent  company  financial  statements  have  been  properly  prepared  in  accordance  with  United  Kingdom 
Generally Accepted Accounting Practice; and 

the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006. 

Basis for opinion 

We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) (ISAs (UK)) and applicable law. Our 
responsibilities under those standards are further described in the Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial 
statements section of our report. We are independent of the group and the parent company in accordance with the 
ethical requirements  that  are relevant  to  our  audit  of  the financial  statements  in  the  UK, including  the  FRC’s Ethical 
Standard as applied to SME listed entities and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance with these 
requirements. We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for 
our opinion. 

Conclusions relating to going concern 

We have nothing to report in respect of the following matters in relation to which the ISAs (UK) require us to report to 
you where: 

• 

• 

the directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting in the preparation of the financial statements is not 
appropriate; or 
the directors have not disclosed in the financial statements any identified material uncertainties that may cast 
significant doubt about the group’s or the parent company’s ability to continue to adopt the going concern basis 
of accounting for a period of at least twelve months from the date when the financial statements are authorised 
for issue. 

Summary of our audit approach 
Key audit matters 

Revenue recognition 
Inventory valuation and provisioning 
Disclosures in relation to going concern 

Group 
• 
• 
• 
Parent Company 
• 

No key audit matters 

64 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
REPORT OF THE INDEPENDENT AUDITORS 
TO THE SHAREHOLDERS OF SOLID STATE PLC (continued) 

Summary of our audit approach 
Materiality 

Scope 

Key audit matters 

Overall materiality: £350,000 (2019: £350,000) 
Performance materiality: £263,000 (2019: £263,000) 

Group 
• 
• 
Parent Company 
• 
• 
Our audit procedures covered 95% of revenue, 95% of total assets and 96% of 
profit before tax. 

Overall materiality: £348,000 (2019: £348,000) 
Performance materiality: £261,000 (2019: £261,000) 

Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgment, were of most significance in our audit of the 
group and parent company financial statements of the current period and include the most significant assessed risks of 
material misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) we identified, including those which had the greatest effect on 
the overall audit strategy, the allocation of resources in the audit and directing the efforts of the engagement team. 
These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the group and parent company financial statements as a 
whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters.  

Group key audit matters 

Revenue recognition 
Key 
description 

audit  matter 

How  the  matter  was 
addressed in the audit 

The risk - revenue recognition 

Refer  to  accounting  policies  and  critical  accounting  judgements  in  Note  1  to  the  group 
financial statements and note 3. 

The  group’s  revenue  comprises  sales  of  electronic  equipment  to  its  customers  after 
deductions for discounts and anticipated returns. There are also certain contracts where 
retentions have been received or where obligations are satisfied in stages. 

Revenue underpins the key measures of performance of the group. 

There is a risk that revenue could be misstated through: 

• 
• 
• 

inappropriate application of the group’s revenue recognition policies; 
recognition of revenue in the wrong period; or 
inaccurate estimates for returns or where revenue is recognised over time. 

Our response 

We assessed whether revenue was recognised in line with the Group's revenue recognition 
policies, and lFRS15. 

Our procedures included a combination of controls and substantive tests. We selected a 
sample of items to check that revenue was recognised on shipment and that the cut-off of 
revenue transactions around the year end was appropriate. 

We  critically  assessed  the  revenue  recognition  for  specific  contracts  where  revenue  is 
recognised  over  the  course  of  the  agreement  and resulted  in  deferred  income.  We  also 
reviewed the provision for returns by assessment of the level and nature of post year end 
credit notes. 

65 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
REPORT OF THE INDEPENDENT AUDITORS 
TO THE SHAREHOLDERS OF SOLID STATE PLC (continued) 

Group key audit matters 

Inventory valuation and provisioning 
Key 
description 

matter 

audit 

The risk – stock valuation and provisioning 

Refer to accounting policies and critical accounting judgements in note 1, and note 15. 

How  the  matter  was 
addressed in the audit 

The group holds a combination of finished goods and good for re-sale, together with work 
in  progress.  Finished  goods  and  good  for  re-sale  comprise  a  range  of  bought  in  and 
manufactured  specialist  electronic  equipment.  Work  in  progress  is  substantially  the 
material cost of assemblies and manufactured products at varying stages of completion 
at the year end. 

The valuation of inventory, which by its nature is specialist, involves judgement relating 
to the potential obsolescence of inventory including net realisable value (NRV). 

The  group  has  in  place  a  policy  for  addressing  this  risk  and  recognises  provisions 
accordingly. 

Our response 

We attended and undertook physical inventory counts at key locations prior to lock down 
across the group, validating that inventory held was accurately recorded and was in good 
physical condition. 

We reviewed  and  tested  the year-end inventory  provisioning calculations  prepared by 
management, including their arithmetic integrity.  

We  have  obtained  justification  from  management  on  the  assumptions  adopted within 
the  provisioning  calculations  and  assessed  any  specific  areas  where  a  provision  was 
considered necessary. We performed testing to ensure that the valuation of inventory is 
stated at the lower of cost or NRV by comparing the sales value of the products to their 
actual cost. 

Disclosures in relation to going concern 
Key 
description 

matter 

audit 

The Risk – Going Concern disclosure 

Refer to the basis of preparation – going concern 

How  the  matter  was 
addressed in the audit 

The going concern assessment of the Group, which considers the impact of the current 
COVID-19  pandemic  on  the  expected  performance  of  the  business,  may  not  be 
appropriately disclosed in the financial statements. 

Our Response 

We  have  assessed  the  cash  flow  forecasts,  together  with  expected  headroom  and 
challenged the assumptions used by management. 

We have considered management’s sensitivities against current trading performance and 
the resulting potential impact on headroom. 

We  have  reviewed  the  disclosures  within  the  financial  statements  in  respect  of  the 
impact of Covid-19, the recent trading performance and the financial resources available 
to the group. 

We are satisfied with the adequacy of the going concern disclosures within the financial 
statements. 

Parent company key audit matters 
We have determined that there are no key audit matters to communicate in our report. 

66 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
REPORT OF THE INDEPENDENT AUDITORS 
TO THE SHAREHOLDERS OF SOLID STATE PLC (continued) 

Our application of materiality 
When establishing our overall audit strategy, we set certain thresholds which help us to determine the nature, timing 
and extent of our audit procedures. When evaluating whether the effects of misstatements, both individually and on 
the financial statements as a whole, could reasonably influence the economic decisions of the users we take into 
account the qualitative nature and the size of the misstatements. Based on our professional judgement, we 
determined materiality as follows: 

Group  

Parent company 

Overall materiality 

£350,000 (2019: £350,000) 

£348,000 (2019: £348,000) 

Basis  for  determining  overall 
materiality 

7.5% of adjusted profit before tax 

5% of net assets 

Rationale 
applied 

for 

benchmark 

Adjusted  result  before  tax  chosen  as 
the Group is profit oriented 

Net  assets  chosen  as  the  parent  is  a 
holding company 

Performance materiality 

£263,000 (2019: 263,000) 

£261,000 (2019: £261,000) 

for 
Basis 
performance materiality 

determining 

Reporting of misstatements to 
the Audit Committee 

75% of overall materiality 

75% of overall materiality 

Misstatements  in  excess  of  £20,000 
that 
and  misstatements 
threshold that, in our view, warranted 
reporting on qualitative grounds.  

below 

Misstatements in excess of £20,000 and 
misstatements  below  that  threshold 
that, in our view, warranted reporting on 
qualitative grounds.  

An overview of the scope of our audit 
The group consists of 6 components, located in the United Kingdom, USA and Ireland.  

The coverage achieved by our audit procedures was: 

Full  scope  audits  were  performed  for  4  components  and  analytical  procedures  at  group  level  for  the  remaining  2 
components. 

Full scope audit 

Total 

Number of 
components 

4 

4 

Revenue 

Total assets 

Profit before tax 

95% 

95% 

95% 

95% 

96% 

96% 

Analytical procedures at group level were performed for the remaining 2 components. 

67 

                                                                                                                             
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
REPORT OF THE INDEPENDENT AUDITORS 
TO THE SHAREHOLDERS OF SOLID STATE PLC (continued) 

Other information 

The directors are responsible for the other information. The other information comprises the information included in 
the annual report, other than the financial statements and our auditor’s report thereon. Our opinion on the financial 
statements does not cover the other information and, except to the extent otherwise explicitly stated in our report, we 
do not express any form of assurance conclusion thereon.  

In connection with our audit of the financial statements, our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing 
so, consider whether the other information is materially inconsistent with the financial statements or our knowledge 
obtained in the audit or otherwise appears to be materially misstated. If we identify such material inconsistencies or 
apparent  material  misstatements,  we  are  required  to  determine  whether  there  is  a  material  misstatement  in  the 
financial statements or a material misstatement of the other information. If, based on the work we have performed, we 
conclude that there is a material misstatement of this other information, we are required to report that fact.  

We have nothing to report in this regard. 

Opinions on other matters prescribed by the Companies Act 2006 

In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit: 

• 

• 

the  information  given  in  the  Strategic  Report  and  the  Directors’  Report  for  the  financial  year  for  which  the 
financial statements are prepared is consistent with the financial statements; and 
the  Strategic  Report  and  the  Directors’  Report  have  been  prepared  in  accordance  with  applicable  legal 
requirements. 

Matters on which we are required to report by exception 

In the light of the knowledge and understanding of the group and the parent company and their environment obtained 
in the course of the audit, we have not identified material misstatements in the Strategic Report or the Directors’ Report. 

We have nothing to report in respect of the following matters in relation to which the Companies Act 2006 requires us 
to report to you if, in our opinion: 

• 

adequate accounting records have not been kept by the parent company, or returns adequate for our audit 
have not been received from branches not visited by us; or 
• 
the parent company financial statements are not in agreement with the accounting records and returns; or 
• 
certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or 
•  we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit. 

Responsibilities of directors 

As explained more fully in the directors’ responsibilities statement set out on page …, the directors are responsible for 
the preparation of the financial statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view, and for such internal 
control  as  the  directors  determine  is  necessary  to  enable the  preparation  of  financial  statements  that  are  free  from 
material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error. 

In preparing the financial statements, the directors are responsible for assessing the group’s and the parent company’s 
ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going concern and using the going 
concern basis of accounting unless the directors either intend to liquidate the group or the parent company or to cease 
operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so. 

Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements 

Our  objectives  are  to obtain  reasonable  assurance  about whether  the  financial  statements  as  a  whole  are  free  from 
material  misstatement,  whether  due  to  fraud  or  error,  and  to  issue  an  auditor’s  report  that  includes  our  opinion. 
Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, but is not a guarantee that an audit conducted in accordance with ISAs 
(UK)  will  always  detect a material misstatement  when  it  exists.  Misstatements can arise  from fraud  or error  and  are 
considered material if, individually or in the aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to influence the economic 
decisions of users taken on the basis of these financial statements. 

68 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
REPORT OF THE INDEPENDENT AUDITORS 
TO THE SHAREHOLDERS OF SOLID STATE PLC (continued) 

A further description of our responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements is located on the Financial Reporting 
Council’s website at: http://www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. This description forms part of our auditor’s report. 

Use of our report  

This  report  is  made  solely  to  the  company’s  members,  as  a  body,  in  accordance  with  Chapter  3  of  Part  16  of  the 
Companies Act 2006.  Our audit work has been undertaken so that we might state to the company’s members those 
matters we are required to state to them in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose.  To the fullest extent permitted 
by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility to anyone other than the company and the company’s members as a 
body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed. 

IAN WALL (Senior Statutory Auditor) 
For and on behalf of RSM UK Audit LLP, Statutory Auditor  
Chartered Accountants 
St Philips Point 
Temple Row 
Birmingham 
B2 5AF 
Date 

30 June 2020 

69 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME 

        For the year ended 31 March 2020 

Continuing Operations 
Revenue 
Cost of sales 

Gross profit 
Sales, general and administration expenses 

Profit from operations 
Finance expense 

Profit before taxation 
Tax expense 

Adjusted profit after taxation 
Adjustments to profit 
Profit after taxation 

Profit attributable to equity holders of the parent 

Other comprehensive income 

Total comprehensive income for the year 

Earnings per share 
Basic EPS from profit for the year 

Diluted EPS from profit for the year 

Adjusted EPS measures are reported in note 8 to the accounts. 

Notes 
3, 31 

4 
6 

7 

32 

8 

8 

2020 
£’000 
67,417 
(46,614) 
_______ 
20,803 
(16,681) 
_______ 
4,122 
(120) 
_______ 
4,002 
(588) 
_______ 
4,002 
(588) 
3,414 
_______ 
3,414 
_______ 
- 
_______ 
3,414 
_______ 

2020 
40.1p 

39.5p 

2019 
£’000 
56,299 
(39,927) 
_______ 
16,372 
(13,452) 
_______ 
2,920 
(109) 
_______ 
2,811 
(153) 
_______ 
3,108 
(450) 
2,658 
_______ 
2,658 
_______ 
- 
_______ 
2,658 
_______ 

2019 
31.3p 

30.7p 

The notes on pages 76 to 117 form part of these financial statements. 

70 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 

Share 
Capital 
£’000 
427 

Share 
Premium 
Reserve 
£’000 
3,627 

Foreign 
Exchange 
Reserve 
£’000 
(5) 

Capital 
Redemption 
Reserve 
£’000 
5 

Retained 
Earnings 
£’000 
16,021 

Shares 
held in 
Treasury 
£’000 
(172) 

- 

- 

1 

- 

(1) 

- 

- 

- 

- 

(1) 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

(2) 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

(14) 

3,414 

- 

- 

1 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

(129) 

129 

(1,153) 

- 

(1,153) 

Total 
Equity 
£’000 
19,903 

(14) 

3,414 

- 

(2) 

- 

- 

Balance at 31 March 2019 

IFRS16 Leases adjustment 
on adoption 

Total comprehensive income 
for the year ended 31 March 
2020 

Shares issued 

Foreign exchange 

Rounding  

Transfer of treasury shares 
to AESP 

Dividends 

Share based payment credit 

- 
______ 

- 
_______ 

- 
_______ 

- 
_______ 

381 
_______ 

- 
______ 

381 
______ 

Balance at 31 March 2020 

427 
______ 

3,626 
_______ 

(7) 
_______ 

5 
_______ 

18,521 
_______ 

(43) 
______ 

22,529 
______ 

The notes on pages 76 to 117 form part of these financial statements. 

71 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 

Share 
Capital 
£’000 
425 

Share 
Premium 
Reserve 
£’000 
3,629 

Foreign 
Exchange 
Reserve 
£’000 
- 

Capital 
Redemption 
Reserve 
£’000 
5 

Retained 
Earnings 
£’000 
14,204 

Shares 
held in 
Treasury 
£’000 
(243) 

Total 
Equity 
£’000 
18,020 

2,658 

- 

(5) 

- 

- 

- 

(34) 

(34) 

2,658 

- 

- 

- 

- 

(5) 

- 

- 

- 

2 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

(2) 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

(105) 

105 

- 

(1,036) 

- 

(1,036) 

Balance at 31 March 2018 

Total comprehensive income 
for the year ended 31 March 
2019 

Shares issued 

Foreign exchange 

Purchase of treasury shares  

Transfer of treasury shares 
to AESP 

Dividends 

Share based payment credit 

- 
______ 

- 
_______ 

_______ 

- 
_______ 

300 
_______ 

- 
______ 

300 
______ 

Balance at 31 March 2019 

427 
______ 

3,627 
_______ 

(5) 
_______ 

5 
_______ 

16,021 
_______ 

(172) 
______ 

19,903 
______ 

The notes on pages 76 to 117 form part of these financial statements. 

72 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION 
at 31 March 2020 

Company Number: 00771335 

Notes 

£’000 

£’000 

£’000 

£’000 

2020 

2019 

ASSETS 
NON-CURRENT ASSETS 
Property, plant and equipment 
Right of use lease asset 
Intangible assets 

TOTAL NON-CURRENT ASSETS 

CURRENT ASSETS 
Inventories 
Trade and other receivables 
Deferred tax asset 
Cash and cash equivalents 

TOTAL CURRENT ASSETS 

TOTAL ASSETS 

LIABILITIES 
CURRENT LIABILITIES 
Trade and other payables 
Contract liabilities 
Current borrowings 
Corporation tax liabilities 
Right of use lease liabilities 

TOTAL CURRENT LIABILITIES 

NON CURRENT LIABILITIES 
Non current borrowings 
Right of use lease liabilities 
Provisions 
Deferred tax liability 

TOTAL NON-CURRENT LIABILITIES 

TOTAL LIABILITIES 

NET ASSETS 

10 
11 
12 

15 
16 
23 
22 

17 
18 
19,21,22 

20 

19,21,22 
20 
24 
23 

2,286 
1,055 
8,213 
__________ 

9,662 
13,859 
86 
3,517 
____________ 

10,597 
2,486 
333 
774 
471 

___________ 

- 
677 
304 
507 

___________ 

2,425 
- 
8,892 
__________ 

11,554 

11,317 

27,124 
___________ 
38,678 
___________ 

26,834 
___________ 
38,151 
___________ 

9,648 
13,389 
105 
3,692 
___________ 

8,725 
2,511 
1,333 
519 
- 

___________ 

14,661 

13,088 

4,334 
- 
250 
576 

___________ 

1,488 

____________ 

16,149 

____________ 

22,529 

____________ 

427 
3,626 
5 
(7) 
18,521 
(43) 

____________ 

22,529 

____________ 

5,160 

____________ 

18,248 

____________ 

19,903 

___________ 

427 
3,627 
5 
(5) 
16,021 
(172) 

___________ 

19,903 

___________ 

CAPITAL AND RESERVES ATTRIBUTABLE TO EQUITY 
HOLDERS OF THE PARENT 
Share capital 
Share premium reserve 
Capital redemption reserve 
Foreign exchange reserve 
Retained earnings 
Shares held in treasury 

25 
26 
26 
26 
26 
27 

TOTAL EQUITY 

The financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors  and authorised for issue on 30 June 2020 and were 
signed on its behalf by: 

G S Marsh, Director   

P O James, Director   

The notes on pages 76 to 117 form part of these financial statements. 
73 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
     
 
 
 
         
 
 
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 

OPERATING ACTIVITIES 
Profit before taxation 
Adjustments for: 
Depreciation 
Amortisation 
Impairment of right of use lease asset 
(Profit)/Loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment 
Share based payment expense 
Finance costs 

Profit from operations before changes in working capital and 
provisions 
Decrease/(Increase) in inventories 
Increase in trade and other receivables 
Increase in trade and other payables 
Increase/(decrease) in provisions 

Cash generated from operations 
Income taxes paid 
Income taxes recovered 

Net cash flow from operating activities 

INVESTING ACTIVITIES 
Purchase of property, plant and equipment 
Capitalised own costs and purchase of intangible assets 
Proceeds of sales from property, plant and equipment 
Consideration paid on acquisition of subsidiaries 

Net cash flow from investing activities 

FINANCING ACTIVITIES 
Issue of ordinary shares 
Borrowings drawn 
Borrowings repaid 
Payment obligations for right of use assets 
Interest paid 
Dividend paid to equity shareholders 

Net cash flow from financing activities 

(Decrease)/Increase in cash and cash equivalents 

2020 

2019 

£’000 

£’000 

£’000 

£’000 

4,002 

1,114 
960 
84 
(31) 
381 
120 
  _______ 

6,630 

2,811 

698 
732 

6 
300 
109 
  _______ 

4,656 

1 
(444) 
1,801 
54 
_______ 

(1,198) 
(1,071) 
2,540 
(10) 
  _______ 

1,412 
  _______ 
8,042 

261 
  _______ 
4,917 

(385) 
- 
_______ 

(243) 
- 
  _______ 

(385) 
  _______ 
7,657 

(243) 
  _______ 
4,674 

(579) 
(281) 
103 
- 
_______ 

- 
- 
(5,334) 
(513) 
(80) 
(1,153) 
_______ 

(600) 
(300) 
113 
(3,812) 
  _______ 

(757) 

(4,599) 

(34) 
6,000 
(1,776) 
- 
(109) 
(1,036) 
  _______ 

(7,080) 
  _______ 
(180) 
  _______ 

3,045 
  _______ 
3,120 
  _______ 

The notes on pages 76 to 117 form part of these financial statements. 

74 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

Translational foreign exchange on opening cash 
Net (decrease)/ increase in cash and cash equivalents 
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year 

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year 

2020 
£’000 
5 
(180) 
3,692 
_______ 

3,517 
_______ 

There were no significant non-cash transactions. Cash and cash equivalents comprise: 

Cash available on demand 

2020 
£’000 

3,517 
_______ 

2019 
£’000 
(3) 
3,120 
575 
_______ 

3,692 
_______ 

2019 
£’000 

3,692 
_______ 

The notes on pages 76 to 117 form part of these financial statements. 

75 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES  

Solid State PLC (“the Company”) is a public company incorporated, domiciled and registered in England and Wales 
in the United Kingdom. The registered number is 00771335 and the registered address is: 2 Ravensbank Business 
Park, Hedera Road, Redditch, B98 9EY. 

Basis of preparation 

The principal accounting policies adopted in the preparation of the financial statements are set out below.  These 
policies have been consistently applied to all the years presented, except for the impact of the implementation 
of IFRS 16 Leases. 

These financial statements have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards, 
International Accounting Standards and Interpretations issued by the International Accounting Standards Board 
as  adopted  by  the  European  Union  (“IFRSs”)  and  with  those  parts  of  the  Companies  Act  2006  applicable  to 
companies preparing their accounts under IFRSs.   

As allowed by IFRS 1, we have elected not to apply IFRS retrospectively for business combinations computed prior 
to  1  April  2006  and  have  used  the  carrying  value  of  goodwill  resulting  from  business  combinations  occurring 
before the date of transition as deemed costs, subjecting this to impairment reviews at the date of transition (1 
April 2006) and at the end of each financial year thereafter. 

The  Group  financial  statements  are  presented  in  pounds  sterling  and  all  values  are  rounded  to  the  nearest 
thousand (£’000) except when otherwise indicated. 

Going concern 

Basis of preparation 

In assessing the going concern position of the Group for the Consolidated Financial Statements for the year ended 
31 March 2020, the Directors have considered the Group’s cash flows, liquidity and business activities.  

At 31 March 2020, the Group had cash balances of £3.5 million, a drawn term loan of £0.3m (which was repaid 
post year end in May 2020) and undrawn revolving credit facility (RCF) of £7.5 million.  

Based on the Group’s forecasts, the Directors have adopted the going concern basis in preparing the Financial 
Statements. The Directors have made this assessment after consideration of the Group’s cash flows and related 
assumptions  and  in  accordance  with  the  Guidance  published  by  the  UK  Financial  Reporting  Council.  (Risk 
Management, Internal Control and Related Financial and Business Reporting 2014, the April 2016 guidance on 
Going concern basis of accounting and reporting on solvency and liquidity risks and the various guidance issued 
in 2020). This guidance provides support to Directors and Boards in making the assessment of going concern.  

In assessing going concern the Directors have given careful consideration of the potential impact of the COVID-
19 pandemic on the cashflows and liquidity of the Group over the next 12 month period. 

COVID-19  has  meant  that  the  Group  is  facing  uncertainty  in  customer  demand  and  potential  for  operational 
disruption, albeit to date the Group has avoided material operational impact, and has continued to trade without 
significant interruption. The assessment of the impact of COVID-19 has taken in to account the current measures 
that  have  been  put  in  place  by  the  Group  to  preserve  cash,  which  include;  deferring  non-essential  capital 
expenditure, pausing acquisition activity and reducing discretionary expenditure. 

In preparing the going concern assessment the Directors considered the principal risks and uncertainties that the 
business  faced  which  have  been  disclosed  on  pages  12  to  16.  The  appraisal  identified  that  the  impact  of  the 
COVID-19 disruption was the most significant uncertainty facing the business. The assessment identified three 
areas of potentially significant impact: supply chain disruption; operational disruption; and, downturn in customer 
demand because of the global business disruption caused by COVID-19. The board concluded that the two areas 
of the risk which remained the most uncertain were the impact of potential operational disruption and the length 
of downturn in demand from customers.  

76 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued) 

Whilst  the  Group  has  seen  an  apparent  decline  in  new  programme  design-ins  and  related  bookings,  the  post 
balance sheet period has provided some reassurance as to the level of customer demand which the Group has 
seen in the post lock down period. Q1 is expected to be the period most significantly impacted by the disruption 
as a result of the full lock down. However, it remains uncertain as to the profile of how and when the demand will 
recover as the lockdown is eased.  

The Directors have prepared revised “stressed” forecasts taking account of the results to date, current expected 
demand, and mitigating actions taken, together with an assessment of the liquidity headroom against the cash 
and bank facilities. 

The bank facilities are subject to financial covenants requiring the business to be EBITDA positive therefore this 
facility is available to fund investment in working capital, capital investment or acquisition activities. Should the 
business face such a significant downturn that it was loss making the facility would not be available to be drawn 
to fund additional losses without a covenant waiver or amendment. As a result, in evaluating a stressed forecast 
model the Board have not included the RCF in the headroom. 

This financial modelling is based on applying various sensitivity scenarios to a 12 month base case to 30 June 2021 
which has been prepared based on an extension of the budget. The budget was set before the severity of the 
COVID-19 impact was known.  

In the period since the balance sheet date Group bookings were down circa 15% over the average for the prior 
period,  however,  due  to  the  nature  of  the  business  where  the  Group  has  orders  placed  on  schedules  and 
significant projects, bookings in any given month can see material variations. In preparing a worst case downside 
scenario with no overhead mitigation, it assumes a shortfall in Group revenue of ~23% over 12 months period 
with no cost mitigation. This results in EBITDA reducing by ~88% compared to the Board’s base case expectations 
prior  to  development  of  the  COVID-19  pandemic.  Even  with  this  level  of  Group  EBITDA  reductions,  when 
combined with  the modest investment  mitigation  that  are  within  the  Group’s  control,  the  Directors currently 
believe the Group would retain a reasonable cash surplus thus maintaining sufficient liquidity to meet its liabilities 
as they fall due.  

The Directors have also assessed the impact of an even more severe effect on the Group where the Group faced 
revenue reduction across the 12 month period of ~33%. In this scenario more mitigation is required in terms of 
modest  overhead  reductions,  reduced  capital  investment  to  “critical  investment  only”  and  making  no 
distributions. In this scenario the Group remains cash positive and therefore can maintain sufficient liquidity to 
meet its liabilities as they fall due without looking to additional sources of liquidity.  

In considering the assessment of the Group’s going concern position the Directors have also identified that the 
Group could look to both the Group’s bankers and or the equity markets if additional liquidity were required. 
Albeit none of the sensitivities indicate that the Group would require additional sources of liquidity. 

In the post balance sheet period, the Group has prudently taken actions to conserve cash which have increased 
the cash reserves post year end improving the liquidity position.  

The actions taken included: deferrals of FY19/20 Director and staff pay raises; limiting discretionary expenditure; 
pausing  acquisition  opportunities;  delaying  all  capital  investment  other  than  safety  /  required  maintenance 
investment; adoption of available deferrals on PAYE and VAT from HMRC; and, utilisation of the job retention 
support announcements by the UK Government. At the peak the Group furloughed approximately 30% of the 
staff to align the level of staff resources with reduced Q1 business demand. Given our relationship with the Groups 
primary bankers and the cash and facilities the Group has available the Board has not felt it was necessary or 
appropriate to apply for government backed loans. 

The  Directors  have concluded  that  the  potential impact  of  the  COVID-19  pandemic  described  above  does  not 
represent a material uncertainty over the Group and Company’s ability to continue as a going concern.  

Nevertheless, it is acknowledged that there are potentially material variations in the forecasted level of financial 
performance for the coming year. As a result, the board has not issued guidance to analysts and shareholders. 

77 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued) 

The Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Group has adequate resources to continue in operational 
existence for the next 12 months, therefore it is appropriate to adopt a going concern basis for the preparation 
of  the  Financial  Statements.  Accordingly,  these  financial  statements  do  not  include  any  adjustments  to  the 
carrying amount or classification of assets and liabilities that would result if the Group and Company were unable 
to continue as a going concern.  

Changes in accounting policy and disclosures 

New standards, amendments and interpretations adopted in the year. 

The following new standards, amendments and interpretations have been adopted by the group for the first time 
for the financial year beginning on the 1 April 2019: 

IFRS16 “Leases” 

• 
•  Annual improvements  2015-2017  cycle  (effective  for  accounting  periods  beginning  or  after  1  January 

2019) 

•  Amendment to IAS 28 Investments in associates and joint ventures’ which  clarifies the accounting for 
long term interests in an associate or joint venture, which in substance form part of the net investment 
in the associate or joint venture, but to which equity accounting is not applied. 

•  Amendments  to  IFRS  9  “Financial  Instruments  which  clarifies  the  treatment  of  financial  assets  with 

• 

prepayment features with negative compensation. 
IFRIC 23 Uncertainty over tax treatments which explains how to recognise, and measure deferred and 
current tax where there is uncertainty over the tax treatment. 

The adoption of these standards and amendments has not had a material impact on the Group’s consolidated 
financial statements, except for the adoption of IFRS 16 where the impact of adoption of this new standard is set 
out in note 29. 

New standards, amendments and interpretations to published standards issued but not yet effective and not 
early adopted 

A number of new standards, amendments and interpretations to existing standards have been published that will 
be mandatory for the Group’s accounting periods beginning on or after 1 April 2020 or later periods and which 
the Group has decided not to adopt early are listed below. The Group intends to adopt these standards when 
they become effective. 

• 

IFRS  17  Insurance  contracts  which  establishes  the  principles  for  the  recognition,  measurement, 
presentation and disclosure of insurance contracts and supersedes IFRS 4. 

•  Amendments to IFRS 10 Consolidated financial statements and IAS 28 investments in associates and joint 
ventures which clarifies the accounting treatment for sales or contribution of assets between an investor 
and its associate or joint venture. 

•  Amendments to IFRS 3 business combinations which clarifies the definition of a business 

•  Amendments  to  IAS  1  Presentation  of  financial  statements  and  IAS  8  Accounting  policies  changes  in 
accounting  estimates  and  errors  which  are  intended  to  make  the  definition  of  material  easier  to 
understand. 

•  Amendments to references to the Conceptual framework in IFRS Standards. 

The Directors anticipate that none of the new standards, amendments to standards and interpretations will have 
a significant effect on the financial statements of the Group. 

78 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued) 

Principle of consolidation 

The  consolidated  financial  statements  incorporate  the  financial  results  and  position  of  the  Parent  and  its 
subsidiaries. 

Subsidiaries are all entities over which the Group has control. The Group controls an entity when the group is 
exposed to, or has rights to, variable returns from its involvement with the entity and  has the ability to affect 
those returns through its power to direct the activities of the entity.  

Subsidiaries  are  fully  consolidated  from  the  date  on  which  control  is  transferred  to  the  Group.  They  are 
deconsolidated from the date that control ceases. The acquisition method of accounting is used to account for 
business combinations by the Group. 

Intercompany  transactions,  balances  and  unrealised  gains  on  transactions  between  group  companies  are 
eliminated. Unrealised losses are also eliminated unless the transaction provides evidence of an impairment of 
the  transferred  asset.  Accounting  policies  of  subsidiaries  have  been  changed  where  necessary  to  ensure 
consistency with the policies adopted by the Group. 

Non-controlling  interests  in  the  results  and  equity  of  subsidiaries  are  shown  separately  in  the  consolidated 
statement of comprehensive income, consolidated statement of changes in equity and consolidated statement 
of financial position respectively. 

Business combinations 

The purchase method of accounting is used to account for all business combinations, regardless of whether equity 
instruments or other assets are acquired. Acquisition-related costs are expensed as incurred. 

The  consideration  transferred  for  the  acquisition  of  a  subsidiary  comprises  the:  fair  values  of  the  assets 
transferred;  liabilities  incurred  to  the  former  owners  of  the  acquired  business;  equity  interests  issued  by  the 
group; fair value of any asset or liability resulting from a contingent consideration arrangement; and, fair value of 
any pre-existing equity interest in the subsidiary. 

Identifiable assets acquired, and liabilities and contingent liabilities assumed in a business combination are, with 
limited exceptions, measured initially at their fair values at the acquisition date. The Group recognises any non-
controlling interest in the acquired entity on an acquisition-by-acquisition basis either at fair value or at the non-
controlling interest’s proportionate share of the acquired entity’s net identifiable assets. 

The excess of the: consideration transferred; amount of any non-controlling interest in the acquired entity; and, 
acquisition-date fair value of any previous equity interest in the acquired entity, over the fair value of the net 
identifiable assets acquired is recorded as goodwill.  

If those amounts are less than the fair value of the net identifiable assets of the business acquired, the difference 
is recognised directly in profit or loss as a bargain purchase. Where settlement of any part of cash consideration 
is deferred, the amounts payable in the future are discounted to their present value as at the date of exchange. 
The discount rate used is the entity’s incremental borrowing rate, being the rate at which a similar borrowing 
could be obtained from an independent financier under comparable terms and conditions. 

Contingent  consideration  is  classified  either  as  equity  or  a  financial  liability.  Amounts  classified  as  a  financial 
liability are subsequently remeasured to fair value with changes in fair value recognised in profit or loss. 

If the business combination is achieved in stages, the acquisition date carrying value of the acquirer’s previously 
held equity interest in the acquiree is remeasured to fair value at the acquisition date. Any gains or losses arising 
from such remeasurement are recognised in profit or loss. 

79 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued) 

Impairment of non-financial assets 

Non  financial  assets  that  have  an  indefinite  useful  life  (e.g. Goodwill)  or  other  intangible  assets  which  are not 
ready to use and therefore not subject to amortisation (e.g. on going incomplete R&D programmes) are reviewed 
at least annually for impairment. 

Impairment tests on goodwill are undertaken annually on 31 March, and on other non-financial assets whenever 
events or changes in circumstances indicate that their carrying value may not be reasonable. Where the carrying 
value of an asset exceeds its recoverable amount (i.e. the higher of value in use and fair value less costs to sell), 
the asset is written down accordingly. 

Impairment charges are included in sales, general and administration expenses in the consolidated statement of 
comprehensive income, except to the extent that they reverse gains previously recognised in the  consolidated 
statement of recognised income and expense. An impairment loss recognised for goodwill is not reversed. 

Intangible Assets 

a) Goodwill 

Goodwill arising on an acquisition is recognised as an asset and initially measured at cost, being the excess of the 
fair  value  of  the  consideration  over  the  fair  value  of  the  identifiable assets,  liabilities  and  contingent  liabilities 
acquired. Goodwill is not amortised. However, it is reviewed for potential impairment at least annually or more 
frequently  if events  or  circumstances  indicate  a  potential impairment.  For  the purpose  of impairment  testing, 
goodwill is allocated to each of the Cash Generating Units to which is relates. Any impairment identified is charged 
directly  to  consolidated  statement  of  comprehensive  income.  Subsequent  reversals  of  impairment  losses  for 
goodwill are not recognised. 

b) Development costs 

Expenditure incurred that is directly attributable to the development of new or substantially improved products 
or processes is recognised as an intangible asset when the following criteria are met: 

• 
• 
• 
• 
• 
• 

the product or process is intended for use or sale; 
the development is technically feasible to complete; 
there is an ability to use or sell the product or process; 
it can be demonstrated how the product or process will generate probable future economic benefits; 
there are adequate technical, financial and other resources to complete the development; and 
the development expenditure can be reliably measured. 

Directly attributable costs refers to the materials consumed; the directly attributable labour; and the incremental 
overheads incurred in the development activity. General operating costs, administration costs and selling costs 
do not form part of directly attributable costs.  

All research and other development costs are expensed as incurred.  

Capitalised development costs are amortised on a straight line basis over the period, during which the economic 
benefits  are  expected  to  be  received,  which  typically  range  between  1  and  5  years.  Amortisation  expense  is 
included within sales, general and administration expenses in the statement of comprehensive income. 

The estimated remaining useful lives of development costs are reviewed at least on an annual basis. Amortisation 
commences once the project is completed and revenues are being generated.  

The  carrying  value  of capitalised  development  costs is reviewed  for  potential  impairment  at  least  annually,  or 
more  frequently  if  events  or  circumstances  indicate  a  potential  impairment.  Any  impairment  identified  is 
immediately charged to the consolidated statement of comprehensive income.  

80 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued) 

Intangible Assets – cont’  

c) Software 

Externally acquired software assets are initially recognised at cost and subsequently amortised on a straight line 
basis  over  their  useful  economic  lives.  Cost  includes  all  directly  attributable  costs  of  acquisition.  In  addition 
directly  attributable  costs  incurred  in  the  development  of  bespoke  software  for  the  Group’s  own  use  are 
capitalised.  

The useful economic life over which the software is being amortised has been assessed to be 3 to 5 years. 

The carrying value of capitalised software costs is reviewed for potential impairment at least annually, or more 
frequently if events or circumstances indicate a potential impairment. Any impairment identified is immediately 
charged to the consolidated statement of comprehensive income.  

The costs of maintaining internally developed software, and annual licence fees to utilise third party software, are 
expensed as incurred. 

d) Other intangibles 

Other intangible assets are those which arise on business combinations in accordance with IFRS 3 revised. These 
intangible assets form part of the identifiable net assets of an acquired business and are recognised at their fair 
value and amortised on a systematic basis over their useful economic life which is typically 5 to 10 years. This 
includes customer relationships, the fair value of which has been evaluated using the multi period excess earnings 
method “MEEM”.  

The MEEM model valuation was cross checked to the cost of product development and customer qualification to 
which the relationships relate.  

Capitalised  acquisition  intangibles  are  amortised  on  a  straight  line  basis  over  the  period,  during  which  the 
economic  benefits  are  expected  to  be  received,  which  typically  range  between  5  and  10  years.  Amortisation 
expense is included within sales, general and administration expenses in the statement of comprehensive income. 

The  carrying  value  of  other  intangible  assets  is  reviewed  for  potential  impairment  at  least  annually,  or  more 
frequently if events or circumstances indicate a potential impairment. Any impairment identified is immediately 
charged to the consolidated statement of comprehensive income. 

Property, plant and equipment 

Property, plant and equipment is stated at historical cost or deemed cost where IFRS 1 exemptions have been 
applied, less accumulated depreciation and any recognised impairment losses. 

Costs include the original purchase price of the asset and the costs attributable to bringing the asset to its working 
condition for its intended use including any qualifying finance expenses. 

Depreciation is provided on all items of property, plant and equipment to write off the carrying value of items 
over their expected useful economic lives.  It is applied at the following rates: 

Short leasehold property improvements- straight line over minimum life of lease 
Fittings and equipment- 25% per annum on a reducing balance basis 
Computers- 20% per annum on a straight line basis 
Motor vehicles- 25% per annum on a reducing balance basis 

The residual values and useful lives of the assets are reviewed, and adjusted if appropriate, at each balance sheet 
date. An asset’s carrying amount is written down immediately to its recoverable amount if its carrying amount is 
greater  than  its  estimated  net  realisable  value.  Gains  and  losses  on  disposal  are  determined  by  comparing 
proceeds with carrying amounts. These are included in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income. 

81 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued) 

Adoption of IFRS 16 “Leases” 

IFRS 16 “Leases” addresses the definition of a lease, the recognition and measurement of leases and establishes 
the principles for the reporting useful information to users of the financial statements about the leasing activities 
of both lessees and lessors. A key change arising from IFRS 16 is that most operating leases will be accounted for 
on  balance  sheet  for  lessees.  The  standard  replaces  the  existing  standards  and  interpretations  in  respect  of 
leases. 

The Group has applied judgement to determine the lease term for some lease contracts in which as lessee there 
includes a renewal option. The assessment of whether the Group is reasonably certain to exercise such options 
impacts the lease term, which affects the amount of lease liabilities and right-of-use assets recognised. 

Implementation of IFRS 16 ‘Leases’ requires the Group to recognise new right of use assets and lease liabilities 
for certain operating leases that principally relate to the Group’s manufacturing facilities. 

The nature of expenses related to these leases has changed in the year ended 31 March 2020 because the Group 
now recognises a depreciation charge for the right of use assets and an interest expense on lease liabilities. 

Previously, for non-variable lease expenses, the Group recognised operating lease costs on a straight-line basis 
over the lease term and recognised assets and liabilities only to the extent that there was a timing difference 
between actual lease payments and the expense recognised. 

This change results in the recognition of a liability on the balance sheet for all leases which convey a right to use 
the asset for the period of the contract. 

The lease liability reflects the present value of the future rental payments and interest, discounted using either 
the effective interest rate or the incremental borrowing rate of the entity. 

Payments associated with short-term leases and leases of low value assets are recognised on a straight-line basis 
over the lease term as an expense within the income statement.  

Solid State PLC has adopted IFRS16 using the modified retrospective transition approach, with the cumulative 
effect  of  adopting  the  new  standard  being  recognised  in  equity  as  an  adjustment  to  the  opening  balance  of 
retained earnings for the current period. 

On adoption of IFRS 16 the group has used the following practical expedients permitted by the standards: 

• 
• 
• 

applying a single discount rate to a portfolio of leases with reasonably similar characteristics 
excluding initial direct costs for the measurement of the right of use asset at the date of initial adoption 
accounting for leases with a term ending within 12 months of the date of initial application in the same 
way as short-term leases. 

On adoption of IFRS 16, the group has recognised lease liabilities in relation to leases which had previously been 
classified as operating leases under the principles of IAS 17 leases. These liabilities were measured at the present 
value of the remaining unavoidable lease payments, discounted using the lessee’s incremental borrowing rate at 
1 April 2019. The weighted average lessee’s incremental borrowing rate applied to the lease liabilities at 1 April 
2019 was 3%. 

Included in note 29 are the disclosures in respect of the impact of adoption of IFRS 16 on the financial statements. 

Right-of-use assets 

The Group recognises right-of-use assets at the commencement date of the lease (i.e., the date the underlying 
asset  is  available  for  use).  Right-of-use  assets  are  measured  at  cost,  less  any  accumulated  depreciation  and 
impairment  losses  and  adjusted  for  any  remeasurement  of  lease  liabilities.  The  cost  of  right-of-use  assets 
includes the amount of lease liabilities recognised, initial direct costs incurred, and lease payments made at or 
before  the  commencement  date  less  any  lease  incentives  received.  Right-of-use  assets  are  related  to  the 
property leases, plant and machinery and motor vehicles and are depreciated on a straight-line basis over the 
lease term. 

82 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued) 

Right of use lease liabilities 

At the commencement date of the lease, the Group recognises lease liabilities measured at the present value of 
lease  payments  to  be  made  over  the  lease  term.  The  lease  payments  include  lease  payments  less  any  lease 
incentives  receivable.  In  calculating  the  present  value  of  lease  payments,  the  Group  uses  its  incremental 
borrowing rate at the lease commencement date because the interest rate implicit in the lease is not readily 
determinable.  

After the commencement date, the amount of lease liabilities is increased to reflect the accretion of interest and 
reduced for the lease payments made. In addition, the carrying amount of lease liabilities is remeasured if there 
is a modification, a change in the lease term or a change in the lease payments (e.g., changes to future payments 
resulting from a change in an index or rate used to determine such lease payments). 

Inventories 

Inventories are stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Cost is based on either average purchase cost 
or the cost of purchase on a first in, first out basis which is the most appropriate for the category of inventory. 
Work in progress and finished goods include labour and attributable overheads.  Net realisable value is based on 
estimated selling price less any additional costs to completion and disposal. 

Financial Instruments  

Classification and measurement of financial instruments under IFRS9 classifies financial assets as either held at 
amortised  cost,  fair  value  through  other  comprehensive  income  (FVOCI)  or  fair  value  through  profit  or  loss, 
dependent on the business model and cash flow characteristics of the financial instrument. 

Financial  assets  and  financial  liabilities  are  recognised  when  the  company  becomes  party  to  the  contractual 
provisions of the instrument. 

Financial assets 

The Group classifies its financial assets as subsequently measured at amortised cost under IFRS 9 if it meets both 
of the following criteria:  

•  Hold to collect business model test – The asset is held within a business model  whose objective is to 

• 

hold the financial asset in order to collect contractual cash flows; and  
Solely  payments  of  principal  and  interest  (SPPI)  contractual  cash  flow  characteristics  test  –  The 
contractual terms of the financial asset give rise to cash flows that are SPPI on the principal amount 
outstanding on a specified date. 

Financial assets include: 

Trade and other receivables 

• 
•  Cash and cash equivalents 

Trade and other receivables 

Trade receivables are initially measured at their transaction price. Other receivables are initially recognised at 
fair value plus transaction costs. 

Receivables are held to collect the contractual cash flows which are solely payments of principal and interest. 
Therefore,  these  receivables  are  subsequently  measured  at  amortised  cost  using  the  effective  interest  rate 
method. 

The effect of discounting on these financial instruments is not considered to be material. 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Cash  and  cash  equivalents include cash  at  bank  and  in  hand  and  highly  liquid  interest-bearing  securities  with 
maturities  of  three months  or  less.  Bank  overdrafts are  shown  within borrowings  in  current  liabilities  on  the 
balance sheet. 

83 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued) 

Impairment of financial assets 

IFRS 9 requires an expected credit loss (‘ECL’) model which broadens the information that an entity is required 
to  consider  when  determining  its  expectations  of impairment.  Under  this  new model, expectations  of  future 
events must be taken into account and this will result in the earlier recognition of potential impairments. 

An impairment loss is recognised for the expected credit losses on financial assets when there is an increased 
probability  that  the  counterparty  will  be  unable  to  settle  an  instrument’s  contractual  cash  flows  on  the 
contractual due dates, a reduction in the amounts expected to be recovered, or both. 

The  probability  of  default  and  expected  amounts recoverable  are  assessed  using  reasonable  and  supportable 
past and forward-looking information that is available without undue cost or effort.  The expected credit loss is 
a probability-weighted amount determined from a range of outcomes and takes into account the time value of 
money. 

Impairment of trade receivables 

For trade receivables, expected credit losses are measured by applying an expected loss rate to the gross carrying 
amount.  The expected loss rate comprises the risk of a default occurring and the expected cash flows on default 
based on the aging of the receivable.   

The risk of a default occurring always takes into consideration all possible default events over the expected life 
of those receivables (“the lifetime expected credit losses”). Different provision rates and periods are used based 
on groupings of historic credit loss experience by product type, customer type and location. 

Impairment of other receivables 

The  measurement  of 
‘performing’, 
‘underperforming’ or ‘non-performing’ based on the company’s assessment of increases in the credit risk of the 
financial asset since its initial recognition and any events that have occurred before the year-end which have a 
detrimental impact on cash flows. 

losses  depends  on  whether  the  financial  asset 

impairment 

is 

The financial asset moves from ‘performing’ to ‘underperforming’ when the increase in credit risk since initial 
recognition becomes significant. 

In assessing whether credit risk has increased significantly, the company compares the risk of default at the year-
end with the risk of a default when the investment was originally recognised using reasonable and supportable 
past and forward-looking information that is available without undue cost. 

The risk of a default occurring takes into consideration default events that are possible within 12 months of the 
year-end (“the 12-month expected credit losses”) for ‘performing’ financial assets, and all possible default events 
over the expected life of those receivables (“the lifetime expected credit losses”) for ‘underperforming’ financial 
assets. 

Impairment losses and any subsequent reversals of impairment losses are adjusted against the carrying amount 
of the receivable and are recognised in profit or loss. 

Financial Liabilities and equity 

Financial  liabilities  and  equity  instruments  are  classified  according  to  the  substance  of  the  contractual 
arrangements entered into. 

An  equity  instrument  is  any  contract  that  evidences  a  residual  interest  in  the  assets  of  the  company  after 
deducting all of its liabilities. 

Financial liabilities are classified as either: 

• 
• 

Financial liabilities at amortised cost; or 
Financial liabilities as at fair value through profit or loss (FVTPL). 

All financial liabilities are measured at amortised cost and include: 

Trade and other payables 

• 
•  Contract liabilities 
•  Borrowings 

84 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued) 

Trade payables 

Trade payables are obligations to pay for goods or services that have been acquired in the ordinary course of 
business from suppliers. 

Accounts payable are classified as current liabilities if payment is due within one year or less (or in the normal 
operating cycle of the business if longer). If not, they are presented as non-current liabilities.  

They are initially recognised at fair value net of direct transaction costs and subsequently held at amortised cost. 

Contract liabilities 

Contract liabilities comprise payments in advance of revenue recognition and revenue deferred due to contract 
performance obligation not being completed.  

They are classified as current liabilities if the contract performance obligations payment are due to be completed 
within one year or less (or in the normal operating cycle of the business if longer). If not, they are presented as 
noncurrent liabilities.  

Contract liabilities are recognised initially at fair value, and subsequently stated at amortised cost. 

Borrowings 

Borrowings  are  recognised  initially  at  fair  value, net  of  transaction costs  incurred  and  subsequently  stated  at 
amortised cost. Borrowing costs are expensed using the effective interest method. 

Equity instruments and Share capital 

Ordinary shares are classified as equity.  

Incremental costs directly attributable to the issue of new shares or options are shown in equity as a deduction, 
net of tax, from the proceeds. 

Treasury Shares 

Where  any  Group  company  purchases  the  Parent  Company’s  equity  share  capital  (treasury  shares),  the 
consideration paid, including any directly attributable incremental costs (net of income taxes), is deducted from 
equity attributable to the Company’s equity holders until the shares are cancelled, reissued or disposed of. 

These  shares  are  held  in  a  separate  negative  reserve  in  the  capital  section  of  the  consolidated  statement  of 
financial position. Any dividends payable in relation to these shares are cancelled. 

Where such shares are subsequently sold or reissued, any consideration received, net of any directly attributable 
incremental  transaction  costs  and  the  related  income  tax  effects,  is  included  in  equity  attributable  to  the 
Company’s equity holders. 

Dividends 

Equity dividends are recognised when they become legally payable. Interim dividends are recognised when paid. 
Final dividends are recognised when approved by the shareholders at an annual general meeting. 

Exceptional items 

Exceptional items are disclosed separately in the financial statements where it is necessary to do so to provide 
further  understanding  of  the  financial  performance  of  the  Group.  Transactions  are  classified  as  exceptional 
where they relate to an event that falls outside of the ordinary activities of the business and where individually 
or in aggregate, they have a material impact on the financial statements.  

Foreign currency 

Transactions  entered  into  by  Group  entities  in  a  currency  other  than  the  currency  of  the  primary  economic 
environment in which it operates are recorded at the rates ruling when the transactions occur.  Foreign currency 
monetary  assets  and  liabilities  are  retranslated  at  the  rates  ruling  at  the  balance  sheet  date.    Exchange 
differences arising are recognised in the statement of comprehensive income. 

85 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued) 

Revenue  

The Group manufactures and distributes a range of electronic equipment. Revenue comprises sales to external 
customers after discounts, excluding value added taxes. 

The Group’s performance obligations with respect to physical goods is to deliver a finished product to a customer. 

Revenue is recognised when control of the products has transferred, being when the products are delivered to 
the customer, the customer has full control over the products supplied, and there is no unfulfilled obligation that 
could affect the customer’s acceptance of the products.  

Delivery occurs when the products have been shipped to the specific location, the risks of obsolescence and loss 
have been transferred to the customer, and either the customer has accepted the products in accordance with 
the sales contract, the acceptance provisions have lapsed, or the group has objective evidence that all criteria 
for acceptance have been satisfied. 

For goods that are subject to bill and hold arrangements this means: 

the goods are complete and ready for collection; 

• 
•  the  goods  are  separately  identified  from  the  Group’s  other  stock  and  are  not  used  to  fulfil  any  other 

orders;  

•  and the customer has specifically requested that the goods be held pending collection. 

Normal payment terms apply to the bill and hold arrangements. 

Revenue is only recognised to the extent that it is highly probable that a significant reversal will not occur.  

No element of financing is deemed present as the sales are made with a credit term of 30 to 90 days, which is 
consistent with market practice. The Group does not expect to have any contracts where the period between 
the transfer of the promised goods or services to the customer and payment by the customer exceeds one year. 
As a consequence, the Group does not adjust any of the transaction prices for the time value of money. 

The Group’s obligation to provide a refund for faulty products under the standard warranty terms is recognised 
as a returns provision. A receivable is recognised when the goods are delivered as this is the point in time that 
the consideration is unconditional because only the passage of time is required before the payment is due. 

Segmental reporting 

Operating segments are reported in a manner consistent with the internal reporting provided to the Executive 
Directors, who are responsible for allocating resources and assessing performance of the operating segments.  

A business segment is a group of assets and operations engaged in providing products or services that are subject 
to risks and returns that are different from those of other business segments.  

A geographical segment is engaged in providing products or services within a particular economic environment 
that  are  subject  to  risks  and  returns  that  are  different  from  those  of  segments  operating  in  other  economic 
environments.  

The Executive Directors assess the performance of the operating segments based on the measures of revenue, 
Profit Before Taxation (PBT) and Profit After Taxation (PAT). Central overheads are not allocated to the business 
segments. 

Pensions  

The  pension  schemes  operated  by  the  Group  are  defined  contribution  schemes.  The  pension  cost  charge 
represents the contributions payable by the Group.  

86 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued) 

Current and deferred taxation 

Income tax on the profit or loss for the year comprises current and deferred tax. 

Taxable profit differs from accounting profit because it excludes certain items of income and expense that are 
recognised in the financial statements but are treated differently for tax purposes. Current tax is the amount of 
tax expected to be payable or receivable on the taxable profit or loss for the current period. This amount is then 
amended for any adjustments in respect of prior periods. 

Current  tax  is  calculated  using  tax  rates  that  have  been  written  into  law  (‘enacted’)  or  irrevocably 
announced/committed by the respective Government (‘substantively enacted’) at the period-end date. Current 
tax receivable (assets) and payable (liabilities) are offset only when there is a legal right to settle them net and 
the entity intends to do so. This is generally true when the taxes are levied by the same tax authority. 

Because of the differences between accounting and taxable profits and losses reported in each period, temporary 
differences  arise  on  the  amount certain  assets  and liabilities  are  carried  at for  accounting  purposes  and  their 
respective tax values. Deferred tax is the amount of tax payable or recoverable on these temporary differences. 

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognised where the carrying amount of an asset or liability in the balance 
sheet differs from its tax base, except for differences arising on: 

• 
• 

• 

the initial recognition of goodwill 
the initial recognition of an asset or liability in a transaction which is not a business combination and at 
the time of the transaction affects neither accounting nor taxable profit: and 
investments in subsidiaries and jointly controlled entities where the Group is able to control the timing 
of  the  reversal  of  the  difference  and it is  probable  the  difference will  not reverse in  the foreseeable 
future. 

Recognition of deferred tax assets is restricted to those instances where it is probable that taxable profit will be 
available against which the differences can be utilised. 

The amount of the asset or liability is determined using tax rates that have been enacted or substantively enacted 
by  the  balance  sheet  date  and  are  expected  to  apply  when  the  deferred  tax  liabilities/(assets)  are 
settled/(recovered). 

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset when the Group has a legally enforceable right to offset current tax 
assets and liabilities, and the deferred tax assets and liabilities relate to taxes levied by the same tax authority. 

Share based payment 

Where share options are awarded to employees, the fair value of the options at the date of grant is charged to 
the consolidated statement of comprehensive income over the vesting period.  Non-market vesting conditions 
are  taken into  account by  adjusting  the  number  of  equity  instruments expected  to  vest  at each  statement  of 
financial position date so that, ultimately, the cumulative amount recognised over the vesting period is based on 
the number of options that eventually vest. Market vesting conditions are factored into the fair value of options 
granted. As long as all other vesting conditions are satisfied, a charge is made irrespective of whether the market 
vesting conditions are satisfied. The cumulative expense is not adjusted for failure to achieve a market vesting 
condition. 

Where the terms and conditions of options are modified before they vest, the increase in the fair value of the 
options, measured immediately before and after the modification, is also charged to the consolidated statement 
of comprehensive income over the remaining vesting period. 

87 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

2. 

CRITICAL ACCOUNTING ESTIMATES AND JUDGEMENTS 

The preparation of financial statements requires the use of accounting estimates which, by definition, will seldom 
equal  the  actual  results.  Management  also  needs  to  exercise  judgement  in  applying  the  Group’s  accounting 
policies. This note provides an overview of the areas that involved a higher degree of judgement or complexity, 
and of items which are more likely to be materially adjusted due to estimates and assumptions turning out to be 
wrong.  

Expected credit losses  

In accordance with IFRS 9 the Group is required to make an assessment of the expected credit loss occurring 
over the life of its trade receivables. As a result of the COVID-19 disruption to businesses across the globe the 
Directors expect that the risk of credit default has significantly increased over historical norms.  

As a result, the Directors have made a judgemental assessment of the potential increase in credit losses in the 
current business environment. In these financial statements the Directors have provided full disclosures of the 
provisions for credit default in note 21. 

The increase in the provision based on the Directors judgemental assessment of expected credit loss reflects an 
increase of £305k to £496k. The increase in the year is significant but not considered material to the financial 
statements as a whole. 

Estimated useful life of research and development and intangible assets arising on acquisitions 

The  periods  of  amortisation  adopted  to  write  down  capitalised  product  and  process  development  requires 
estimates to be made in respect of the useful economic lives of the intangible assets to determine an appropriate 
amortisation rate.  

Capitalised development costs are amortised over the period during which economic benefits are expected to 
be received which is typically 1 – 5 years. Intangible assets arising on acquisitions are amortised straight line over 
the period during which economic benefits are expected to be received which is typically 5 – 10 years. 

The amortisation charge for capitalised development costs in the current year is £367k; if the lives were reduced 
by one year across all the projects which are being amortised the charge would increase by circa £100k.  

The amortisation charge for intangible assets arising on acquisitions in the current year is £505k; if the lives were 
reduced by one year the charge would increase by £51k.  

Estimated goodwill impairment 

Goodwill is not amortised; however, it is reviewed for impairment at least annually or more frequently if events 
or circumstances indicate a potential impairment. For the purpose of impairment testing Goodwill is allocated to 
each of the cash generating units (CGU) to which it relates.  

The impairment assessment is made based on the discounted future cashflows of the CGU. Forecasting the future 
cashflows requires judgement. The key assumptions made in preparing the discounted future cashflows and the 
sensitivities are set out in note 13. 

Recognition criteria for capitalisation of development expenditure 

The Group capitalises R&D in accordance with IAS 38. There is judgement in respect of when R&D projects meet 
the requirement  for capitalisation, which  internal costs  are  directly  attributable  and  therefore  appropriate  to 
capitalise and when the development programme is complete, and capitalisation should cease.  

Amounts  capitalised  include  the  total  cost  of  any  external  products  or  services  and  labour  costs  directly 
attributable  to  the  development  programme.  Management  judgement  is  involved  in  determining  the 
appropriate internal costs to capitalise and the amounts involved. 

If there is any uncertainty in terms of the technical feasibility, ability to sell the product or any other risk that 
means the programme does not meet the requirements of the standard the R&D costs are expensed within the 
consolidated statement of comprehensive income.  

88 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

2. 

CRITICAL ACCOUNTING ESTIMATES AND JUDGEMENTS – (Continued) 

Estimation of level of R&D expenditure which is eligible for R&D tax credits under the SME and large 
company scheme. 

Uncertainties exist in relation to the interpretation of complex tax legislation, changes in tax laws and the amount 
and timing of future taxable income. This could necessitate future adjustments to taxable income and expense 
already recorded.  

At the year-end date, tax liabilities and assets reflect management’s judgements in respect of the application of 
the tax regulations, in particular the R&D tax. 

In assessing our year-end corporation tax liability, we have made a provisional assessment as to the likely amount 
of  development  expenditure  that will  be eligible  under each  of  the  HMRCs  large  company  and  SME R&D  tax 
credit schemes as the detailed tax computations have not been completed.  

Our judgement at year end assumed that the level of eligible spend was comparable with prior years. At 31 March 
2020 there are current and deferred tax provisions totalling approximately £1.2m.  

Due to the uncertainties noted above, it is possible that the Group’s initial estimates are different to the final 
position adopted when the tax computation is finalised, resulting in a different tax payable or recoverable from 
the amounts provided. 

Provisions for returns 

The Group provides for an estimate of sales returns at the year end, which reduces product sales and accounts 
receivable, and increases stock. This provision is estimated by management based on historical experience and 
judgement on current contract sales.   

The estimation process used to determine the provision has been applied on a consistent basis with previous 
years and no material adjustments have been necessary to increase or decrease these reserves as a result of a 
significant change in underlying estimates.  

Due to the significant value of sales in the Group, the difference between the actual and estimated returns could 
impact operating results both positively and negatively. 

Provisions for slow moving or obsolete inventories 

Inventories are carried at the lower of cost and net realisable value (NRV). NRV is reviewed in detail on an on 
going  basis  and  provision  for  obsolete  inventory  is  made  based  on  a  number  of  factors  including  age  of 
inventories, the risk of technical obsolescence and the expected future usage.  

Differences between such estimates and actual market conditions may have a material impact on the amount of 
the carrying value of inventories and may result in adjustments to cost of sales. See note  15 for details of the 
inventory provisions and the amounts written off to consolidated statement of comprehensive income in the 
year.   

89 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

3. 

REVENUE 

The Group derives revenue from the transfer of goods at a point in time in the following major product lines and 
geographical regions:  

United Kingdom 
Rest of Europe 
Asia 
North America 
Rest of World 

Total revenue 

Computing products 
Communications products 
Power products 
Opto electronic and electronic components and modules 

Total revenue 

See further segmental disclosures in note 31. 

2020 
£’000 

48,596 
6,885 
4,416 
7,235 
285 
_______ 

67,417 
_______ 

2020 
£’000 

10,267 
5,292 
12,611 
39,247 
_______ 

67,417 
_______ 

2019 
£’000 

44,989 
5,230 
2,540 
3,426 
114 
_______ 

56,299 
_______ 

2019 
£’000 

12,063 
3,650 
10,184 
30,402 
_______ 

56,299 
_______ 

90 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

4. 

PROFIT FROM OPERATIONS 

This has been arrived at after charging/(crediting): 

Continuing charges /(credits) 
Staff costs (see note 5) 
Share based payment expenses 
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment 
Depreciation of right of use lease asset 
Impairment of right of use lease asset 
Amortisation of intangible assets 
Profit on disposal of property, plant and equipment 
Auditors’ remuneration: 

Audit fees 
Audit of accounts of associates of the company 
Other assurance fees 
Non audit fees: 

Corporate finance services 
Other advisory services 

Operating lease rentals: 

2020 
£’000 

11,386 
381 
646 
468 
84 
960 
31 

75 
- 
1 

9 
18 

2019 
£’000 

8,753 
300 
698 
- 
- 
732 
7 

63 
17 
- 

- 
54 

Plant and machinery 
Other 

Research and development costs (includes relevant staff costs) 
Foreign exchange differences 
Stock write (backs)/downs 

36 
440 
1,785 
(144) 
680 
_______ 
The foreign exchange differences have been treated as an adjustment to cost of sales rather than as an overhead 
as they arise from sales income and cost of sales expenditures. 

- 
- 
1,350 
(277) 
(111) 
_______ 

Details of transactions with businesses associated with the Directors are included within the Directors’ 
remuneration report on page 46 to 59. 

As set out in the audit committee report the UK trading subsidiaries are exempt from the requirements to have 
an audit and file audited financial statements by virtue of section 479A of the Companies Act 2006. In adopting 
the  exemption  Solid  State  PLC  has  provided  a  statutory  guarantee  to  these  subsidiaries  in  accordance  with 
section 479C of the Companies Act 2006. 

91 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

5. 

STAFF COSTS 

Staff costs for all employees during the year, including the Executive Directors, were as follows: 

Wages and salaries 
Social security costs 
Other pension costs 
Share based payment charges 

Total staff costs 

2020 
£’000 

9,344 
1,223 
819 
381 
_______ 

11,767 
_______ 

2019 
£’000 

7,421 
829 
503 
300 
_______ 

9,053 
_______ 

Wages and salaries include termination costs of £47k (2019: £93k) 

The average monthly number of employees during the year, including the Executive Directors, was as follows: 

Selling and distribution 
Manufacturing and assembly 
Management and administration 

2020 
Number 

114 
104 
38 
_______ 

256 
_______ 

2019 
Number 

112 
98 
33 
_______ 

243 
_______ 

Key management is considered to be Group Board Directors. Therefore, the key compensation is disclosed in the 
Remuneration Committee Report on page 46 to 59 which includes Directors emoluments, interests, and services 
contracts. The total key management compensation including employers NI is £1,495k (2019: £905k). 

92 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

2020 
£’000 

80 
40 
______ 

120 
______ 

2019 
£’000 

109 
- 
______ 

109 
______ 

2020 
£’000 

2019 
£’000 

588 
_______ 

588 
______ 

616 
22 
_______ 

638 

(50) 
______ 

588 
______ 

153 
_______ 

153 
______ 

376 
(67) 
_______ 

309 

(156) 
______ 

153 
______ 

6. 

FINANCE EXPENSE 

Bank borrowings 
Interest on lease liabilities 

Total finance expense 

7. 

TAX EXPENSE 

Analysis of continuing total tax expense 

Total tax charge from continuing operations 

Current tax expense 

UK corporation tax on profits or losses for the year 
Adjustment in respect of prior periods 

Deferred tax credit 

Total tax charge 

93 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

The reasons for the difference between the actual tax charge for the year and the standard rate of corporation 
tax in the UK applied to profits for the year are as follows: 

Profit before tax including discontinued operations 

Expected tax charge based on the standard rate of corporation tax in the UK 
of 19% (2018 19%) 
Effect of: 
Expenses not deductible for tax purposes 
Difference between depreciation for the year and capital allowances 
Tax relief on exercise of share options exercised 
Enhanced relief on research and development expenditure 
Overseas tax rate differences 
Deferred tax asset (recognised)/not recognised 
Change in rate in respect of deferred tax recognition 
Adjustments in respect of prior years 

Total tax charge 

2020 
£’000 
4,002 
_______ 

2019 
£’000 
2,811 
_______ 

760 

534 

24 
42 
4 
(338) 
10 
(5) 
69 
22 
_______ 

588 
_______ 

25 
25 
(52) 
(359) 
(27) 
74 
- 
(67) 
_______ 

153 
_______ 

The UK corporation tax rate is 19% (effective from 1 April 2017). As a result of the amendment in 2020 which 
was substantially enacted on 17 March 2020 the rate of corporation tax is set to remain at 19%. The deferred tax 
liabilities at 31 March 2019 have been calculated based on this rate. 

R&D tax credits 

The Group recognised a credit of £24k (2019: £nil) within operating profit in relation to claims made under the 
Research  and  Development  expenditure credit  scheme  (RDEC).  There  were  also claims made  under  the  SME 
scheme which are recognised within the tax expense. 

94 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

8. 

EARNINGS PER SHARE 

The earnings per share is based on the following: 

Adjusted continuing earnings post tax 
Reported continuing earnings post tax 

Weighted average number of shares 
Diluted number of shares 

Reported EPS 
Basic EPS from profit for the year 

Diluted EPS from profit for the year 

Adjusted EPS 
Adjusted Basic EPS from profit for the year 

Adjusted Diluted EPS from profit for the year 

2020 
£’000 

4,002 
3,414 

2019 
£’000 

3,108 
2,658 

8,510,074 
8,635,331 

8,488,675 
8,648,719 

40.1p 

39.5p 

47.0p 

46.3p 

31.3p 

30.7p 

36.6p 

35.9p 

Earnings per ordinary share has been calculated using the weighted average number of shares in issue during 
the year. The  weighted average  number of  equity shares  in issue  was  8,510,074  (2019: 8,488,675)  net of  the 
treasury shares disclosed in note 27. 

The  diluted  earnings  per  share  is  based  on  8,635,331  (2019:  8,648,719)  ordinary  shares  which  allow  for  the 
exercise of all dilutive potential ordinary shares. 

The adjustments to profit made in calculating the adjusted earnings are set out in note 32. 

9. 

DIVIDENDS 

Prior year final dividend paid of 8.3p per share (2019: 8p) 
Current year interim dividend paid of 5.25p per share (2019: 4.2p) 
Cancelled dividends on shares held in treasury 

Final dividend proposed for the year 7.25p per share (2019: 8.3p) 

2020 
£’000 

708 
448 
(3) 
_______ 

1,153 
_______ 

620 
_______ 

2019 
£’000 

682 
358 
(4) 
_______ 

1,036 
_______ 

708 
_______ 

The proposed final dividend has not been accrued for as the dividend will be approved by the shareholders at 
the annual general meeting. 

95 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

10. 

PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT 

Year ended 31 March 2020 

Cost 
1 April 2019 
Additions 
Disposals 

31 March 2020 

Depreciation and impairment 
1 April 2019 
Charge for the year 
On disposal 

31 March 2020 

Net book value 
31 March 2020 

Year ended 31 March 2019 

Cost 
1 April 2018 
Additions 
Acquisitions 
Disposals 

31 March 2019 

Depreciation and impairment 
1 April 2018 
Charge for the year 
On disposal 

31 March 2019 

Net book value 
31 March 2019 

Short 
leasehold 
property 
improvements 
£’000 

1,453 
65 
- 
_______ 
1,518 
_______ 

494 
233 
- 
_______ 
727 
_______ 

791 
_______ 

Short 
leasehold 
property 
improvements 
£’000 

1,439 
14 
- 
- 
_______ 
1,453 
_______ 

348 
146 
- 
_______ 
494 
_______ 

Motor  
vehicles 
£’000 

1,074 
115 
(342) 
_______ 
847 
_______ 

568 
142 
(270) 
_______ 
440 
_______ 

407 
_______ 

Motor  
vehicles 
£’000 

1,107 
243 
- 
(276) 
_______ 
1,074 
_______ 

433 
291 
(156) 
_______ 
568 
_______ 

Fittings, 
equipment 
and 
computers 
£’000 

2,743 
399 
- 
_______ 
3,142 
_______ 

1,783 
271 
- 
_______ 
2,054 
_______ 

1,088 
_______ 

Fittings, 
equipment 
and 
computers 
£’000 

2,010 
343 
390 
- 
_______ 
2,743 
_______ 

1,522 
261 
- 
_______ 
1,783 
_______ 

Total 
£’000 

5,270 
579 
(342) 
_______ 
5,507 
_______ 

2,845 
646 
(270) 
_______ 
3,221 
_______ 

2,286 
_______ 

Total 
£’000 

4,556 
600 
390 
(276) 
_______ 
5,270 
_______ 

2,303 
698 
(156) 
_______ 
2,845 
_______ 

959 

506 

960 

2,425 

96 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

11. 

RIGHT OF USE LEASE ASSETS 

Year ended 31 March 2020 

Cost 
1 April 2019 
Additions 

31 March 2020 

Amortisation 
1 April 2019 
Charge for the year 
Impairment 

31 March 2020 

Net book value 
31 March 2020 

Land and 
 buildings 
£’000 

1,712 
182 
_______ 
1,894 
_______ 

407 
453 
84 
_______ 
944 
_______ 

950 
_______ 

Motor 
vehicles / 
other 
 £’000 

- 
120 
_______ 
120 
_______ 

- 
15 
- 
_______ 
15 
_______ 

105 
_______ 

Total 
£’000 

1,712 
302 
_______ 
2,014 
_______ 

407 
468 
84 
_______ 
959 
_______ 

1,055 
_______ 

The  impairment  relates  to  the  impairment  of  the  right  of  use  asset  relating  to  space  at  the  Group’s  legacy 
Pangbourne site which has been exited with the warehousing consolidated into the Groups Redditch facility. As 
the legacy Pangbourne facility is no longer being utilised the right of use asset has been impaired. 

The total depreciation expense of £468k has been charged to operating expenses. There are no material capital 
commitments at the balance sheet date. 

97 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

12. 

INTANGIBLE ASSETS 

Year ended 31 March 2020 

Cost 
1 April 2019 
Additions 
Acquisitions 

31 March 2020 

Amortisation 
1 April 2019 
Charge for the year 

31 March 2020 

Net book value 
31 March 2020 

Development 
Costs 
£’000 

Computer 
Software 
£’000 

Goodwill on 
Consolidation 
£’000 

Acquisition 
Intangible 
Assets 
£’000 

983 
200 
- 
_______ 
1183 
_______ 

716 
367 
_______ 
1,083 
_______ 

100 
_______ 

321 
81 
- 
_______ 
402 
_______ 

214 
88 
_______ 
302 
_______ 

100 
_______ 

6,300 
- 
- 
_______ 
6,300 
_______ 

- 
- 
_______ 
- 
_______ 

6,300 
_______ 

3,378 
- 
- 
_______ 
3,378 
_______ 

1,160 
505 
_______ 
1,665 
_______ 

1,713 
_______ 

Total 
£’000 

10,982 
281 
- 
_______ 
11,263 
_______ 

2,090 
960 
_______ 
3,050 
_______ 

8,213 
_______ 

The cost of acquisition intangible assets comprises the estimated net present value of customer relationships 
identified on acquisitions.  The development costs relate to the cost of developing new products and technology 
to enable the company to extend its operations into new growth areas. Any assets developed that are no longer 
deemed to meet the recognition criteria of development costs have been written down. 

Year ended 31 March 2020 - Acquisition intangible assets 

Manufacturing division commercial relationships 
Value Added Distribution division commercial relationships 

Total 

Cost 
£’000 

675 
2,703 
_______ 

3,378 
_______ 

Net book 
value 
£’000 
65 
1,648 
_______ 

1,713 
_______ 

98 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

12. 

INTANGIBLE ASSETS – (continued) 

Year ended 31 March 2019 

Development 
Costs 
£’000 

Computer 
Software 
£’000 

Goodwill on 
Consolidation 
£’000 

Acquisition 
Intangible 
Assets 
£’000 

Cost 
1 April 2018 
Additions 
Acquisitions 

31 March 2019 

Amortisation 
1 April 2018 
Charge for the year 

31 March 2019 

Net book value 
31 March 2019 

683 
300 
- 
_______ 
983 
_______ 

300 
416 
_______ 
716 
_______ 

267 
_______ 

321 
- 
- 
_______ 
321 
_______ 

182 
32 
_______ 
214 
_______ 

107 
_______ 

4,543 
- 
1,757 
_______ 
6,300 
_______ 

- 
- 
_______ 
- 
_______ 

6,300 
_______ 

1,978 
- 
1,400 
_______ 
3,378 
_______ 

876 
284 
_______ 
1,160 
_______ 

2,218 
_______ 

Total 
£’000 

7,525 
300 
3,157 
_______ 
10,982 
_______ 

1,358 
732 
_______ 
2,090 
_______ 

8,892 
_______ 

The cost of acquisition intangible assets comprises the estimated net present value of customer relationships 
identified on acquisitions. The development costs relate to the cost of developing new products and technology 
to enable the company to extend its operations into new growth areas. Any assets developed that are no longer 
deemed to meet the recognition criteria of development costs have been written down. 

Year ended 31 March 2019 - Acquisition intangible assets 

Manufacturing division commercial relationships 
Value Added Distribution division commercial relationships 

Total 

Cost 
£’000 

675 
2,703 
_______ 

3,378 
_______ 

Net book 
value 
£’000 
240 
1,978 
_______ 

2,218 
_______ 

99 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

13.  GOODWILL AND IMPAIRMENT 

Details of the carrying amount of goodwill allocated to cash generating units (CGUs) are as follows: 

 Goodwill carrying amount 

Manufacturing division 
Value Added Distribution division 

Total 

2020 
£’000 

3,011 
3,289 
_______ 

6,300 
_______ 

2019 
£’000 

3,011 
3,289 
_______ 

6,300 
_______ 

The  recoverable  amounts  of  all  the  above  CGUs  have  been  determined  from  a  review  of  the  current  and 
anticipated performance of these units. In preparing the projection, a discount rate of 10% (2019: 10%) has been 
used based on the Group’s estimated weighted average cost of capital.   

A future growth rate of 2.5% (2019: 2.5%) has been assumed beyond the first year, for which the projection is 
based on the budget approved by the Board of Directors. It has been assumed investment in capital equipment 
will equate to depreciation over this period.  

The recoverable amount exceeds the carrying amount by £40,492k (2019: £54,241k).  

The headroom within the Manufacturing division is very significant the more sensitive CGU is the VAD division. 
If the following changes were made to the above key assumptions in respect of the VAD division, the carrying 
amount would still exceed the recoverable amount. 

Discount rate: Increase from 10% to 13% 
Growth rate: Reduction from 2.5% to nil% 

14. 

SUBSIDIARIES 

The subsidiaries of Solid State PLC, included in these consolidated financial statements are as follows: 

Subsidiary undertakings 
Solid State Supplies Limited 

Steatite Limited 

Pacer Technologies Limited 
Pacer Components Limited 
Pacer LLC 
Solid State Supplies Electronics Limited 
Creasefield Limited 
Q-Par Angus Limited 
Ginsbury Electronics Limited 
Wordsworth Technology Kent Limited 
Creasefield Crewkerne Limited 

*Indirect holdings. All other holdings are direct. 

UK 
UK 

UK 
UK 
USA 
Ireland 
UK 
UK 
UK 
UK 
UK 

Proportion of voting 
rights and Ordinary 
share capital held 
100% 

100% 

100% 
100%* 
100%* 
100% 
100% 
100% 
100% 
100% 
100% 

Nature of business 
Distribution of electronic components. 
Distribution of electronic components and 
manufacture of electronic equipment. 
Non trading entity 
Distribution of opto-electronic components. 
Distribution of opto-electronic components. 
Sales office 
Non trading entity 
Non trading entity 
Non trading entity 
Non trading entity 
Non trading entity 

During the financial year Q-Par Angus (Hedera) Limited and Ginsbury Electronics (Hedera) Limited have been dissolved. The 
non-trading  entities  are  exempt  from  filing  audited  accounts  with  the  registrar  under  section  479a  of  the 
Companies Act 2006. 

Aside from the operations in the USA and Ireland identified above the country of operation and of incorporation 
is England and Wales, with the same registered office as Solid State PLC.  

All  UK  trading  subsidiaries  are  exempt  from  the  requirements  to  have  an  audit  and  file  audited  financial 
statements by virtue of section 479A of the Companies Act 2006. In adopting the exemption Solid State PLC has 
provided a statutory guarantee to these subsidiaries in accordance with section 479C of the Companies Act 2006. 

100 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

15. 

INVENTORIES 

Finished goods and goods for resale 
Work in progress 

Total inventories 

2020 
£’000 

8,583 
1,079 
_______ 

9,662 
_______ 

2019 
£’000 

8,712 
936 
_______ 

9,648 
_______ 

The  Directors  are  of  the  opinion  that  the  replacement  value  of  inventories  is  not  materially  different  to  the 
carrying value stated above. These carrying values are stated net of provisions of £1,444k (2019: £1,666k).  

An impairment (credit) / loss of (£111k) (2019: £680k) was recognised in cost of sales during the year against 
inventory due to slow moving and obsolete items. 

Inventory recognised in cost of sales during the year as an expense was £43,769k (2019: £37,168k).    

16. 

TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES 

Trade receivables 
Other receivables 
Prepayments 

2020 
£’000 

11,111 
28 
2,720 
_______ 

13,859 
_______ 

2019 
£’000 

11,428 
280 
1,681 
_______ 

13,389 
_______ 

Impairment losses against  trade receivables of  £313k  were recognised within operating  costs  during the  year 
(2019: £152k). 

17. 

TRADE AND OTHER PAYABLES (CURRENT) 

2020 
£’000 

5,750 
1,320 
14 
3,513 
_______ 

10,597 
_______ 

2019 
£’000 

5,052 
1,084 
14 
2,575 
_______ 

8,725 
_______ 

Trade payables 
Other taxes and social security taxes 
Other payables 
Accruals 

101 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

18. 

CONTRACT LIABILITIES  

Contract liabilities 

2020 
£’000 

2,486 
_______ 

2019 
£’000 

2,511 
_______ 

The  contract liabilities  identified  above  relate  to  unsatisfied  performance  obligations  resulting  from  proforma 
and  advanced  customer  payments  where  we  have  not  recognised  the  revenue  and  provisions  for  product 
returned for rework. All of these contract liabilities are expected to be recognised in the subsequent financial 
year. 

19. 

BANK BORROWINGS AND FACILITIES 

Current borrowings 
Bank borrowings 

Non current borrowings 
Bank borrowings 

Total borrowings 

Within one year 
Between one and two year 
Between two and five years 

Total borrowings 

2020 
£’000 

333 

- 
_______ 

333 
_______ 

2020 
£’000 

333 
- 
- 
_______ 

333 
_______ 

2019 
£’000 

1,333 

4,334 
_______ 

5,667 
_______ 

2019 
£’000 

1,333 
1,333 
3,001 
_______ 

5,667 
_______ 

The bank facility is secured by a fixed and floating charge over the assets of the Company and the Group. At the 
balance sheet date, the Group had the following facilities: 

• 

£4.0m Acquisition term loan tranche B of which £0.3m remained drawn at the balance sheet date and 
was repaid in May 2020. 

•  Revolving credit facility of £7.5m which was undrawn at the balance sheet date. This is a committed 

• 

facility until Nov 2021 when it is due for renewal. 
In  addition  the  group  has  a  multi-currency  overdraft  facility  of  £1,000k  (2019:  £1,000k)  which  was 
undrawn at both year ends.  

The multi currency overdraft facility is in place to facilitate flexibility in managing currency payment. However, 
the Group cannot exceed a maximum utilised facilities of £7.8m.  

The  groups  banking  facilities  are  subject  to  three  financial  covenants,  being:  leverage;  debt  service;  and,  a 
tangible net worth covenant. These covenants were met at all measurement points throughout the period. 

102 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

20. 

RIGHT OF USE LEASE LIABILITIES  

Current right of use lease liabilities 
Non-current right of use lease liabilities 

Total right of use lease liabilities 

Within one year 
Between one and two year 
Between two and five years 

Total right of use lease liabilities 

2020 
£’000 

471 
677 
_______ 

1,148 
_______ 

2020 
£’000 

471 
328 
349 
_______ 

1,148 
_______ 

2019 
£’000 

- 
- 
_______ 

- 
_______ 

2019 
£’000 

- 
- 
- 
_______ 

- 
_______ 

On adoption of IFRS 16 a right of use lease liability has been recognised at 1 April 2019. Further disclosure of the 
impact of the adoption of IFRS 16 has been given in note 29. 

21. 

FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS  

The Group’s  overall  risk management  programme  seeks to minimise  potential  adverse effects  on  the Group’s 
financial performance. 

The Group’s financial instruments comprise cash and cash equivalents and various items such as trade payables 
and  receivables  that  arise  directly  from  its  operations.    The  Group  is  exposed  through  its  operations  to  the 
following risks: 

• 
• 
• 
• 

Credit risk 
Foreign currency risk 
Liquidity risk 
Cash flow interest rate risk 

In common with all other businesses, the Group is exposed to risks that arise from its use of financial instruments.  
This note describes the Group’s objectives, policies and processes for managing those risks.  Further quantitative 
information in respect of these risks is presented throughout these financial statements. 

There have been no substantive changes in the Group’s exposure to financial instrument risks and consequently 
the objectives, policies and processes are unchanged from the previous period. 

The  Board  has  overall  responsibility  for  the  determination  of  the  Group’s  risk  management  policies.    The 
objective of the Board is to set policies that seek to reduce the risk as far as possible without unduly affecting 
the Group’s competitiveness and effectiveness.  Further details of these policies are set out below. 

Credit risk 
The Group is exposed to credit risk primarily on its trade receivables, which are spread over a range of customers 
and countries, a factor that helps to dilute the concentration of the risk. 

103 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

21. 

FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued) 

It  is  Group  policy,  implemented  locally,  to  assess  the  credit  risk  of  each  new  customer  before  entering  into 
binding contracts.  Each customer account is then reviewed on an ongoing basis (at least once a year) based on 
available information and payment history. 

The maximum exposure to credit risk is represented by the carrying value in the statement of financial position 
as shown in note 16 and in the statement of financial position.  The amount of the exposure shown in note 16 is 
stated net of provisions for doubtful debts. 

The  credit  risk  on  liquid  funds  is  low  as  the  funds  are  held  at  a  bank  with  a  high  credit  rating  assigned  by 
international credit rating agencies. 

Foreign currency risk 

Foreign exchange transaction risk arises when individual Group operations enter into transactions denominated 
in a currency other than their functional currency.  The general policy for the Group is to sell to customers in the 
same currency that goods are purchased in, reducing the transactional risk.  Where transactions are not matched 
excess foreign currency, amounts generated from trading are converted back to sterling and required foreign 
currency amounts are converted from sterling. The use of forward currency contracts are not used speculatively 
and are considered where the Group has a demand for foreign currency that it can reliably forecast. 

Liquidity risk 

The Group operates a Group overdraft facility common to all its trading companies. 

The Group has approximately a three month visibility in its trading and runs a rolling 3 month cash flow forecast.  
If any part of the Group identifies a shortfall in its future cash position the Group has sufficient facilities that it 
can direct funds to the location where they are required.  If this situation is forecast to continue into the future 
remedial action is taken. 

Cash flow interest rate risk 

External  Group  borrowings  are  approved  centrally.    The  Board  accepts  that  this  neither  protects  the  Group 
entirely  from  the  risk  of  paying  rates  in  excess  of  current  market  rates  nor  eliminates  fully  cash  flow  risk 
associated with interest payments.  It considers, however, that by ensuring approval of borrowings is made by 
the Board the risk of borrowing at excessive interest rates is reduced.  The Board considers that the rates being 
paid are in line with the most competitive rates it is possible for the Group to achieve. 

104 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

21. 

FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued) 

Credit risk 

The carrying amount of financial assets represents the maximum credit exposure. The Group maintains its cash 
reserves at a reputable bank.  The maximum exposure to credit risk at the reporting date was: 

Loans and Receivables 

Current financial assets 
Trade and other receivables 
Cash and cash equivalents 

2020 
£’000 

2019 
£’000 

11,139 
3,517 
_______ 

14,656 
_______ 

11,708 
3,692 
_______ 

15,400 
_______ 

The maximum exposure to credit risk for trade receivables at the reporting date by geographic region was: 

Carrying value 

UK 
Non UK 

2020 
£’000 

8,235 
2,876 
_______ 
11,111 
_______ 

2019 
£’000 

9,088 
2,340 
_______ 
11,428 
_______ 

The  Group  policy  is  to  make  a  provision  against  those  debts  that  are  overdue,  unless  there  are  grounds  for 
believing that all or some of the debts will be collected.  During the year the value of provisions made in respect 
of bad and doubtful debts was a charge of £313k (2019: £152k) which re-presented 0.5% (2019: 0.3%) of revenue. 
This provision is included within the sales, general and administration expenses in the Consolidated Statement 
of Comprehensive Income. 

105 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

21. 

FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued) 

Trade receivables ageing by geographical segment 

Geographical area 

Total 
£’000 

Current 
£’000 

2020 
UK 
Non UK 

Total 

UK 
Non UK 

Total provisions 

Total 

IFRS 9  
UK expected loss rate 
Non UK expected loss rate 

8,576 
3,031 
_______ 
11,607 

(341) 
(155) 
_______ 
(496) 
_______ 
11,111 
_______ 

4.0% 
5.1% 
_______ 

7,414 
2,265 
_______ 
9,679 

(54) 
(31) 
_______ 
(85) 
_______ 
9,594 
_______ 

0.7% 
1.3% 
_______ 

Geographical area 

Total 
£’000 

Current 
£’000 

2019 
UK 
Non UK 

Total 

UK 
Non UK 

Total provisions 

Total 

IFRS 9  
UK expected loss rate 
Non UK expected loss rate 

9,188 
2,431 
_______ 
11,619 

(97) 
(94) 
_______ 
(191) 
_______ 
11,428 
_______ 

1.1% 
3.9% 
_______ 

8,036 
2,018 
_______ 
10,054 

- 
- 
_______ 
- 
_______ 
10,054 
_______ 

0.0% 
0.0% 
_______ 

106 

30 days 
past due 
£’000 

878 
641 
_______ 
1,519 

(94) 
(25) 
_______ 
(119) 
_______ 
1,400 
_______ 

10.7% 
3.9% 
_______ 

30 days 
past due 
£’000 

842 
222 
_______ 
1,064 

- 
(2) 
_______ 
(2) 
_______ 
1,062 
_______ 

0.0% 
0.9% 
_______ 

60 days 
past due 
£’000 

124 
31 
_______ 
155 

(33) 
(9) 
_______ 
(42) 
_______ 
113 
_______ 

26.6% 
29.0% 
_______ 

60 days 
past due 
£’000 

126 
68 
_______ 
194 

- 
(1) 
_______ 
(1) 
_______ 
193 
_______ 

0.0% 
1.5% 
_______ 

90 days 
past due 
£’000 

160 
94 
_______ 
254 

(160) 
(90) 
_______ 
(250) 
_______ 
4 
_______ 

100.0% 
95.7% 
_______ 

90 days 
past due 
£’000 

184 
123 
_______ 
307 

(97) 
(91) 
_______ 
(188) 
_______ 
119 
_______ 

52.7% 
74.0% 
_______ 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

21. 

FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued) 

The Group records provision for impairment losses on its trade receivables separately from gross receivables. 
The movements on this allowance account during the year are summarised below: 

Opening balance 
Acquisition of subsidiaries 
Increase / (decrease) in provisions 
Written off against provisions 
Foreign exchange 

Closing balance 

2020 
£’000 

191 
- 
313 
(8) 
- 
_______ 

496 
_______ 

2019 
£’000 

34 
79 
152 
(72) 
(2) 
_______ 

191 
_______ 

The main factor used in assessing the expected impairment losses of trade receivables is the age of the balances 
and the circumstances of the individual customer. 

As shown in the earlier table, at 31 March 2020 trade receivables of £1,517k which were past their due date were 
not impaired (2019: £1,565k).  

Liquidity risk 

The following are maturities of financial liabilities, including estimated contracted interest payments. 

Carrying  
Amount 

Contractual 
cash flow 

12 months 
or less 

1 – 2 
Years 

2 – 5 
Years 

5+ 
Years 

2020 
Trade and other payables 
Borrowings 
Right of use lease liabilities 
Provisions 

2019 
Trade and other payables 
Borrowings 
Provisions 

10,597 
333 
1,148 
304 
_______ 

10,597 
333 
1,220 
304 
_______ 

10,597 
333 
492 
11 
_______ 

- 
- 
340 
11 
_______ 

- 
- 
388 
32 
_______ 

- 
- 
- 
250 
_______ 

12,382 
_______ 

12,454 
_______ 

11,433 
_______ 

351 
_______ 

420 
_______ 

250 
_______ 

8,725 
5,667 
250 
_______ 

8,725 
5,952 
250 
_______ 

8,725 
1473 
- 
_______ 

- 
1,436 
- 
_______ 

- 
3,043 

_______ 

- 
3,043 
250 
_______ 

14,642 
_______ 

14,927 
_______ 

10,198 
_______ 

1,436 
_______ 

3,043 
_______ 

250 
_______ 

107 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

21. 

FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued) 

Interest rate risk 

The Group finances its business through a Revolving credit facility and two term loans.  During the year the Group 
utilised this facility at a floating rate of interest.  

The Groups banking facilities with Lloyds Bank plc incurs interest at the rate of between 2.0% and 2.55% over 
LIBOR.  The Group is affected by changes in the UK interest rate. 

As  the loans are  all  based  on variable interest rates  the  fair  value  of  the Group’s  financial  instruments  is  not 
materially different to the book value. 

In terms of sensitivity, if the ruling base rate had been 1% higher throughout the year the level of interest payable 
would have been £67k (2019: £44k) higher and if 1% lower throughout the year the level of interest payable 
would have been lower by the same amount. 

Foreign currency risk 

The Group’s main foreign currency risk is the short term risk associated with accounts receivable and payable 
denominated in currencies that are not the subsidiaries functional currency.  The risk arises on the difference in 
the exchange rate between the time invoices are raised/received and the time invoices are settled/paid.  For 
sales denominated in foreign currencies the Group will try to ensure that the purchases associated with the sale 
will be in the same currency.  

All monetary assets and liabilities of the Group were denominated in sterling with the exception of the following 
items which were denominated in US dollars, and which are included in the financial statements at the sterling 
value based on the exchange rate ruling at the statement of financial position date. 

The following table shows the net assets/(liabilities) exposed to US dollar exchange rate risk that the Group has 
at 31 March 2020: 

Trade receivables 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Trade payables and accruals 

2020 
£’000 

5,223 
1,342 
(1,439) 
_______ 

5,126 
_______ 

2019 
£’000 

6,078 
243 
(1,246) 
_______ 

5,075 
_______ 

There were also net assets of £112k in euros (2019: £163k). 

The Group is exposed to currency risk because it undertakes trading transactions in US dollars and euros.  The 
Directors  do  not  generally  consider  it  necessary  to enter  into  derivative financial instruments  to  manage  the 
exchange risk arising from its operations, but from time to time when the Directors consider foreign currencies 
are weak and it is known that there will be a requirement to purchase those currencies, forward arrangements 
are entered into.  There were no forward purchase agreements in place at 31 March 2020 (2019: £nil) with £nil 
net exposure (2019: £nil). 

The effect of a strengthening of 10% in the rate of exchange in the currencies against sterling at the statement 
of financial position date would have resulted in an estimated net increase in pre-tax profit for the year and an 
increase in net assets of approximately £582k (2019: £582k) and the effect of a weakening of 10% in the rate of 
exchange in the currencies against sterling at the statement of financial position date would have resulted in an 
estimated net decrease in pre-tax profit for the year and a decrease in net assets of approximately £476k (2019: 
£476k). 

108 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

21. 

FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued) 

Capital risk management 

The Group defines total capital as equity in the consolidated statement of financial position plus net debt or less 
net funds plus deferred consideration. Total capital at 31 March 2020 was £19,345k (2019: £21,878k). 

The  Group  defines  net  (cash)/leverage  as  net  (cash)/debt  plus  deferred  consideration  which  totals  (£3,184k) 
(2019: £1,975k). In calculating net (cash)/debt the Group has excluded the right of use lease liabilities of £1,148k 
(2019: £1,319k) from its definition and calculation. 

In managing its capital, the Group’s main objectives when managing capital are to safeguard the Group’s ability 
to continue as a going concern in order to provide returns for shareholders and benefits for other stakeholders 
and to maintain an optimal capital structure to reduce the cost of capital. 

Consistent  with  others  in  the  industry,  the  Group  monitors  capital  based  on  the  gearing  ratio.  This  ratio  is 
calculated as leverage divided by total capital. At 31 March 2020 the gearing ratio was (16.5%) (2019: 9.0%). 

The Group seeks to maintain a gearing ratio that balances risks and returns at an acceptable level and also to 
maintain sufficient funding to enable the Group to meet its working capital and strategic investment need in the 
light of changes in economic conditions and the characteristic of the underlying assets.  

In making decisions to adjust its capital structure to achieve these aims the Group considers not only its  short-
term  position  but  also  its  long  term  operational  and  strategic  objectives  and  sets  the  amount  of  capital  in 
proportion to risk.  

The Group’s gearing ratio at 31 March 2020 is shown below: 

2020 
£’000 

(3,517) 
333 
_______ 

(3,184) 
_______ 

427 
3,626 
18,520 
5 
(7) 
(43) 
_______ 

22,529 
_______ 

(16.5%) 
_______ 

2019 
£’000 

(3,692) 
5,667 
_______ 

1,975 
_______ 

427 
3,627 
16,021 
5 
(5) 
(172) 
_______ 

19,903 
_______ 

9.02% 
_______ 

Cash and cash equivalents 
Borrowings / bank overdrafts 

Net (cash)/leverage 

Share capital 
Share premium account 
Retained earnings 
Capital redemption reserve 
Foreign exchange reserve 
Shares held in treasury 

Equity 

Gearing ratio (net leverage / equity + net leverage/(cash)) 

109 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

22. 

NET DEBT 

Year ended 31 March 2020 (£’000) 

Bank borrowing due within one year 
Bank borrowing due after one year 

Total borrowings 
Cash and cash equivalents  

(Net debt) / net cash 

Increase / (decrease) in cash in the year 
Increase in borrowings in the year 
Repayment of borrowings in the year 

Net movement resulting from cashflows 

Net cash at 1 April 

Net movement resulting from cashflows 
Borrowings acquired in the year 
Other non-cash movements 

Net cash/(net debt) at 31 March 

At 1 April 
2019 

(1,333) 
(4,334) 
_______ 
(5,667) 
3,692 
_______ 

(1,975) 
_______ 

Cash flow 

1,333 
4,001 
_______ 
5,334 
(180) 
_______ 

5,154 
_______ 

Other non-
cash 
movement 

At 31 March 
2020 

(333) 
333 
_______ 
- 
5 
_______ 

5 
_______ 

2020 
£’000 
(180) 
- 
5,334 
_______ 

5,154 
_______ 

2020 
£’000 
(1,975) 

5,154 
- 
5 
_______ 

3,184 
_______ 

(333) 
- 
_______ 
(333) 
3,517 
_______ 

3,184 
_______ 

2019 
£’000 
3,120 
(6,000) 
1,776 
_______ 

(1,104) 
_______ 

2019 
£’000 
575 

(1,104) 
(1,443) 
(3) 
_______ 

(1,975) 
_______ 

110 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

23. 

DEFERRED TAX 

The Group’s deferred tax positions arise primarily on share-based payments, accelerated capital allowances, 
capitalised development costs and intangible assets arising on acquisition of subsidiaries: 

At 1 April  
Deferred tax arising on acquisition of subsidiaries 
Credit for the year 
Deferred tax adjustment in respect of prior periods 
Effect of tax rate change 

Net deferred tax at 31 March 

Deferred tax (liabilities)/assets in relation to: 
Accelerated capital allowances on property plant and equipment 
Short term timing differences on intangible assets 
Share based payments 
Short term timing differences 
Losses carried forward 

Net deferred tax at 31 March 

Deferred tax assets 
Deferred tax liabilities 

Net deferred tax at 31 March 

2020 
£’000 

(471) 
- 
119 

(69) 
_______ 

(421) 
_______ 

(193) 
(369) 
81 
60 
- 
_______ 

(421) 
_______ 

86 
(507) 
_______ 
(421) 
_______ 

2019 
£’000 

(426) 
(201) 
129 
- 
27 
_______ 

(471) 
_______ 

(108) 
(481) 
57 
29 
31 
_______ 

(472) 
_______ 

105 
(576) 
_______ 
(471) 
_______ 

The UK corporation tax rate is 19% (effective from 1 April 2017) as a result of the amendment in 2020 which 
was substantially enacted on 17 March 2020 the rate of corporation tax is set to remain at 19%. The deferred 
tax liabilities at 31 March 2020 have been calculated based on this rate. 

The amount of the net reversal of deferred tax expected to occur next year is approximately £141k (2019: 
£117k) relating to the timing differences identified above. 

There is an unrecognised deferred tax asset of £17k (2019: £1k) in respect of the future tax deduction that 
would be available based on the share price at the balance sheet date compared to the share price at the date 
of grant of the options and share bonus which is used to calculate the share based payments charge. If this 
deferred tax asset had been recognised it would have been credited to other comprehensive income.  

This was not recognised given it is immaterial and the share bonus being exercised post year end when the 
share price was lower than at the balance sheet date therefore this deferred tax asset is not expected to be 
recoverable.  

In addition, there is an unrecognised deferred tax asset in relation to capital losses carried forward. The capital 
losses carried forward are approximately £275k. The associated deferred tax asset of approximately £52k has 
not been recognised due to the uncertainty over the recoverability combined with the fact it is immaterial. 

111 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

24. 

PROVISIONS 

At 1 April  
Provision for dilapidations acquired 
Provisions utilised during the year 
Charged to statement of comprehensive income 

Provisions at 31 March 

2020 
£’000 

250 
- 
- 
54 
_______ 

304 
_______ 

2019 
£’000 

- 
260 
(10) 
- 
_______ 

250 
_______ 

The Group has provided for property related provisions which includes obligations in respect of exited legacy 
premises and dilapidations provisions it expects to exit within the next 5 years. Based on using a risk-free discount 
rate of 2.5% the Group has assessed the impact of discounting to be immaterial and has not therefore discounted 
the provisions. 

25. 

SHARE CAPITAL 

Allotted issued and fully paid 
8,548,878 (2019: 8,532,878) ordinary shares of 5p 

2020 
£’000 

2019 
£’000 

427 
_______ 

427 
_______ 

The ordinary shares carry no right to fixed income, the holders of are entitled to receive dividends as declared 
and are entitled to one vote per share at shareholder meetings. 

Details of options granted are set out in the Remuneration Committee Report on page 46 to 59.  At 31 March 
2020 the number of shares covered by option agreements amounted to nil (2019: 64,000). At the balance sheet 
date there were 112,000 (2019: 64,000) share options which had vested and remained unexercised. 

Share options exercised in the prior year by the Directors are disclosed in the Directors remuneration report on 
page 35 to 38. 

An  Enterprise Management Incentive  Scheme  was  adopted  by  the company  in  September  2000  and formally 
approved at an Extraordinary General Meeting on 12 December 2000. 

26. 

RESERVES 
Full details of movements in reserves are set out in the consolidated statement of changes in equity on page 70. 

The following describes the nature and purpose of each reserve within owners’ equity. 

Reserve 
Share premium 
Capital redemption 

Retained earnings 

Shares held in treasury 

Description and Purpose 
Amount subscribed for share capital in excess of nominal value. 
Amounts transferred from share capital on redemption of issued 
shares. 
Cumulative net gains and losses recognised in the consolidated 
statement of comprehensive income. 
Shares held by the Group for future staff share plan awards 

112 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

27. 

TREASURY SHARES 
At 31 March 2020 the Group held 7,374 (2019: 29,374) shares in treasury with a cost of £43k (2019: £172k). No 
shares have been cancelled. 

At 1 April  
Purchase of shares into treasury  
Transfer of shares to the All Employee Share Plan (AESP) 

At 31 March 

2020 
shares 

29,374 
- 
(22,000) 
_______ 
7,374 
_______ 

2019 
Shares 

37,394 
10,000 
(18,020) 
_______ 
29,374 
_______ 

28. 

SHARE BASED PAYMENT 
On 1 June 2017 the company granted nil cost EMI options to each of the following Directors (who prior to this 
had no outstanding options) under the Company’s Long Term Incentivisation Plan, as follows: 

Name 

Number of options granted 

Grant Price 

Exercise price 

Mr G S Marsh 

Mr M T Richards 

Mr J L Macmichael 

Mr P O James 

48,000 

48,000 

48,000 

48,000 

£4.23 

£4.23 

£4.23 

£4.23 

0.1p 

0.1p 

0.1p 

0.1p 

The share price at the date of Grant was £4.23 as the options are effectively £nil cost options the fair value is 
determined to equal to the share price at the date of grant under the Black Scholes model.  

The options are subject to performance criteria determined by the Remuneration Committee linked to the pre 
tax  profit  performance of  the Group  in each year  of  a  three  year  vesting period from  the  date of  grant. The 
performance period runs from 1 April 2017 to 31 March 2020. 

The performance conditions attached to the options are identical for all the Directors. Performance is measured 
on an annual basis over the three year period with a maximum of 16,000 options available in each of years one, 
two and three.  

In each year, 10% of the maximum award vests for Group performance in-line with the Board approved budgeted 
pre tax profit with a scale such that the maximum award only vests in the event that the Group budgeted pre tax 
profit is exceeded by 25%. 

The Remuneration Committee retains the ability to pay at its discretion additional cash  and share bonuses in 
exceptional circumstances. 

In January 2020, 21,400 shares were awarded under the All Employee Share Plan. The share price at the date of 
award was £6.43 resulting in a £137k share based payment charge recognised in the year as part of the 2020 
share based payment expense of £381k.  

In January 2019, 17,600 shares were awarded under the All Employee Share Plan. The share price at the date of 
award was £3.34 resulting in a £59k share based payment charge recognised in the year as part of the 2019 share 
based payment expense of £300k.  

64,000 of the Executive Directors’ options vested as the performance criteria for full vesting were achieved in 
the year ended 31 March 2020. (In the year ended 31 March 2019 64,000 options vested as the performance 
criteria were achieved). 

There was no other long term share based incentive plan in place for the year ended 31 March 2020. Further 
disclosure of the LTIP for 2021 and beyond is disclosed in the remuneration committee report on pages 46 to 59. 

113 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

29. 

LEASES UNDER IFRS 16 “LEASES” 

The  implementation  of  IFRS  16  at  1  April  2019,  which  had  no  material  impact  on  total  net  assets  or  cash,  is 
summarised in the narrative and table set out below: 

ASSETS 
NON-CURRENT ASSETS 
Non current assets previously reported 
Right of use lease assets 

TOTAL NON-CURRENT ASSETS 

Total current assets previously reported 

TOTAL CURRENT ASSETS 

TOTAL ASSETS 
LIABILITIES 
CURRENT LIABILITIES 
Current liabilities previously reported 
Right of use lease liabilities  

TOTAL CURRENT LIABILITIES 

NON-CURRENT LIABILITIES 
Non current liabilities previously reported 
Non current right of use lease liabilities 

TOTAL NON-CURRENT LIABILITIES 

TOTAL LIABILITIES 

TOTAL NET ASSETS 

Reported 
31 March 
2019 
£’000 

  Adoption 
of IFRS16 

1 April 19 

£’000 

£’000 

11,317 
- 
___________ 
11,317 

26,834 
___________ 
26,834 
___________ 
38,151 

(13,088) 
- 
___________ 
(13,088) 

(5,160) 
- 
___________ 
(5,160) 
___________ 
(18,248) 
___________ 

19,903 

- 
1,305 
___________ 
1,305 

- 
___________ 
- 
___________ 
1,305 

- 
(448) 
___________ 
(448) 

- 
(871) 
___________ 
(871) 
___________ 
(1,319) 
___________ 

11,317 
1,305 
___________ 
12,622 

26,834 
___________ 
26,834 
___________ 
39,456 

(13,088) 
(448) 
___________ 
(13,536) 

(5,160) 
(871) 
___________ 
(6,031) 
___________ 
(19,567) 
___________ 

(14) 

19,889 

(14) 
- 
___________ 
(14) 
___________ 

16,007 
3,882 
___________ 
19,889 
___________ 

CAPITAL AND RESERVES ATTRIBUTABLE TO EQUITY HOLDERS OF THE PARENT 
16,021 
Retained earnings 
3,882 
Other reserves as previously reported 
___________ 
19,903 
___________ 

TOTAL EQUITY 

Differences between the operating lease commitments disclosed at 31 March 2019 under IAS 17 discounted at 
the  incremental  borrowing  rate  at  1  April  2019  and  lease  liabilities  recognised  at  1  April  2019  are  explained 
below: 

Minimum operating leases commitments disclosed at 31 March 2019 
Include break clauses included under IFRS 16 
Exclude operating leases not treated under IFRS 16 
Discounted using the lessee's incremental borrowing rate at the date of initial application 

Lease liability recognised as at 1 April 2019 

£’000 
1,409 
39 
(33) 
(96) 
_______ 
1,319 
___________ 

114 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

30. 

CAPITAL COMMITMENTS 

At 31 March 2020 and 31 March 2019 there were no capital commitments. 

31. 

SEGMENT INFORMATION 

The  Group’s  primary  reporting  format  for  segment  information  is  business  segments  which  reflect  the 
management  reporting  structure  in  the  Group.    The  Value  Added  Distribution  division  comprises  Solid  State 
Supplies Ltd, Pacer LLC and Pacer Components Ltd companies. The Manufacturing division includes Steatite Ltd. 

Year ended 31 March 2020 

External revenue 

Profit before tax 
Taxation 

Profit after taxation 

Consolidated statement of financial 
position 
Assets 
Liabilities 

Net assets 

Other 
Capital expenditure: 
  Tangible fixed assets  
  Intangible assets 
Depreciation 
Impairment 
Amortisation 
Share based payments 
Interest 

Value Added 
Distribution 
division 
£’000 
39,247 
______ 
2,252 
(510) 
______ 
1,742 

Manufacturing 
division 
£’000 
28,170 
______ 
4,439 
(538) 
______ 
3,901 

18,649 
(6,521) 
______ 
12,128 

565 
2 
545 
84 
51 
- 
21 
______ 

11,890 
(7,845) 
______ 
4,045 

316 
279 
569 
- 
404 
- 
19 
_____ 

Head  
office 
£’000 
- 
______ 
(2,689) 
460 
______ 
(2,229) 

8,139 
(1,783) 
______ 
6,356 

- 
- 
- 
- 
505 
381 
80 
______ 

Continuing 
operations 
£’000 
67,417 
______ 
4,002 
(588) 
______ 
3,414 

38,678 
(16,149) 
______ 
22,529 

881 
281 
1,114 
84 
960 
381 
120 
______ 

No individual customer contributed more than 10% of the Group’s revenue in the financial year ended 31 March 
2020 or the prior year.   

115 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

31. 

SEGMENT INFORMATION (continued) 

Year ended 31 March 2019 

External revenue 

Profit before tax 
Taxation 

Profit after taxation 

Consolidated statement of financial 
position 
Assets 
Liabilities 

Net assets 

Other 
Capital expenditure: 
  Tangible fixed assets  
  Intangible assets 
Depreciation 
Amortisation 
Share based payments 
Interest 

Value Added 
Distribution 
division 
£’000 
30,402 
______ 
1,677 
(349) 
______ 
1,328 

Manufacturing 
division 
£’000 
25,897 
______ 
2,707 
(86) 
______ 
2,621 

17,387 
(5,665) 
______ 
11,722 

62 
- 
417 
18 
- 
7 
______ 

12,137 
(6,227) 
_____ 
5,910 

538 
300 
281 
430 
- 
2 
_____ 

Head  
office 
£’000 
- 
______ 
(1,573) 
282 
______ 
(1,291) 

8,627 
(6,356) 
______ 
2,271 

- 
- 
- 
284 
300 
100 
______ 

Continuing 
operations 
£’000 
56,299 
______ 
2,811 
(153) 
______ 
2,658 

38,151 
(18,248) 
______ 
19,903 

600 
300 
698 
732 
300 
109 
______ 

United Kingdom 
Rest of Europe 
Asia 
North America 
Other 

External revenue by 
location of customer 

Total assets by 
location of assets 

2020 
£’000 

2019 
£’000 

2020 
£’000 

2019 
£’000 

48,596 
6,885 
4,416 
7,235 
285 
_______ 

44,989 
5,230 
2,540 
3,426 
114 
_______ 

36,919 
1 
- 
1,758 
- 
_______ 

37,406 
- 
- 
745 
- 
_______ 

Net tangible capital 
expenditure by location 
of assets 

2020 
£’000 

881 
- 
- 

- 
_______ 

2019 
£’000 

600 
- 
- 
- 
- 
_______ 

67,417 
_______ 

56,299 
_______ 

38,678 
_______ 

38,151 
_______ 

881 
_______ 

600 
_______ 

All the above relate to continuing operations. 

116 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 (continued) 

32.   ADJUSTMENTS TO PROFIT 

The Group’s results are reported after a number of imputed non-cash charges and non-recurring items. We have 
provided  additional  adjusted  performance metrics  to  aid  understanding  and  provide clarity  over  the Group’s 
performance  on  an  on-going  cash  basis  before  imputed  non-cash  accounting  charges  consistent  with  how 
analysts  and  investors  tell  us  they  review  our  business  performance.  In  presenting  an  adjusted  profit  metric 
adjusting for the following items: 

•  Non-cash charges arising from share-based payments and the amortisation of acquisition intangibles. 
•  Non-recurring cash costs relating to the re-organisation of the Manufacturing division and acquisition costs. 
•  Non-recurring profit from the sale of fully written down stock. 
•  Non-recurring tax credits arising primarily from prior year R&D claims and tax deductions on share options. 

Acquisition and re-organisation costs 
Non recurring profit from sale of full written down stock 
Amortisation of acquisition intangibles 
Share based payments 

Adjustment to profit before tax 
Current and deferred taxation effect 
Non recurring tax credits 

Adjustments to profit after tax 

Reported gross profit 
Adjustments to gross profit 

Adjusted gross profit 

Reported operated profit 
Adjustments to operating profit 

Adjusted operating profit 

Reported operating margin percentage 
Operating margin percentage impact of adjustments 

Adjusted operating margin percentage 

Reported profit before tax 
Adjustments to profit before tax 

Adjusted profit before tax 

Reported profit after tax 
Adjustments to profit after tax 

Adjusted profit after tax 

117 

2020 
£’000 
- 
(160) 
505 
381 
_______ 
726 
(138) 
- 
_______ 
588 

2020 
£’000 
20,803 
(160) 
_______ 
20,643 
_______ 
4,122 
726 
_______ 
4,848 
_______ 
6.1% 
1.1% 
_______ 
7.2% 
_______ 
4,002 
726 
_______ 
4,728 
_______ 
3,414 
588 
_______ 
4,002 
_______ 

2019 
£’000 
149 
- 
284 
300 
_______ 
733 
(142) 
(141) 
_______ 
450 

2019 
£’000 
16,372 
- 
_______ 
16,372 
_______ 
2,920 
733 
_______ 
3,653 
_______ 
5.2% 
1.3% 
_______ 
6.5% 
_______ 
2,811 
733 
_______ 
3,544 
_______ 
2,658 
450 
_______ 
3,108 
_______ 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
COMPANY STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION 
at 31 March 2020 

Company Number: 00771335 

FIXED ASSETS 
Investments 

CURRENT ASSETS 
Debtors 
Deferred tax asset 
Cash at bank and in hand 

CREDITORS:  Amounts falling due within one year 

NET CURRENT LIABILITIES 

2020 

2019 

Notes 

£’000 

£’000 

£’000 

£’000 

4 

5 

6 

7 

13,255 

13,320 

4,370 
86 
28 
_______ 
4,484 

(10,903) 
_______ 

6,205 
67 
31 
_______ 
6,303 

(8,397) 
  _______ 

(6,419) 
  _______ 

(2,094) 
  _______ 

CREDITORS:  Amounts falling due after more than one year 

- 

(4,334) 

NET ASSETS 

CAPITAL AND RESERVES 
Called up share capital 
Share premium account 
Capital redemption reserve 
Retained earnings  
Shares held in treasury 

SHAREHOLDERS’ FUNDS 

8 
9 
9 
9 
10 

6,836 
  _______ 

427 
3,626 
5 
2,821 
(43) 
  _______ 

6,836 
  _______ 

6,892 
  _______ 

427 
3,627 
5 
3,005 
(172) 
  _______ 

6,892 
  _______ 

The company made a total comprehensive income in the year of £716k (2019: £765k). 

The financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors and authorised for issue on 30 June 2020. 

G S Marsh, Director   

P O James, Director   

The notes on pages 120 to 122 form part of these financial statements. 

118 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                                           
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
COMPANY STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY 
For the year ended 31 March 2020 

Share 
Capital 
£’000 

Share  
Premium 
reserve 
£’000 

Capital 
Redemption 
Reserve 
£’000 

Retained 
earnings 
£’000 

Shares 
Held in 
Treasury 
£’000 

Share-
holders 
Funds 
£’000 

Balance at 1 April 2019 

427 

3,627 

Issue of new shares 

Rounding 

Total comprehensive 
income  
For the year ended 31 
March 2020 

Share based payment credit 

Shares transfer to the AESP 

Dividends 

1 

(1) 

- 

- 

- 

(1) 

- 

- 

- 

- 

5 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

3,005 

(172) 

6,892 

- 

1 

716 

381 

- 

- 

- 

- 

(129) 

129 

- 

- 

716 

381 

- 

- 
_______ 

- 
_______ 

- 
_______ 

(1,153) 
_______ 

- 
_______ 

(1,153) 
_______ 

Balance at 31 March 2020 

427 
_______ 

3,626 
_______ 

5 
_______ 

2,821 
_______ 

(43) 
_______ 

6,836 
_______ 

Share 
Capital 
£’000 

Share  
Premium 
reserve 
£’000 

Capital 
Redemption 
Reserve 
£’000 

Retained 
earnings 
£’000 

Shares 
Held in 
Treasury 
£’000 

Share-
holders 
Funds 
£’000 

Balance at 1 April 2018 

425 

3,629 

Issue of new shares 

2 

(2) 

Total comprehensive 
income  
For the year ended 31 
March 2019 

Share based payment 
expense 

Treasury shares purchased  

Shares transfer to the AESP 

Dividends 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

5 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

3,081 

(243) 

6,897 

- 

765 

300 

- 

(105) 

- 

- 

- 

(34) 

105 

- 

765 

300 

(34) 

- 

- 
_______ 

- 
_______ 

- 
_______ 

(1,036) 
_______ 

- 
_______ 

(1,036) 
_______ 

Balance at 31 March 2019 

427 
_______ 

3,627 
_______ 

5 
_______ 

3,005 
_______ 

(172) 
_______ 

6,892 
_______ 

The notes on pages 120 to 122 form part of these financial statements. 
119 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020  

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES 

The  following  accounting  policies  have  been  applied  consistently  in  dealing  with  items  which  are  considered 
material in relation to the Company’s financial statements. 

Basis of preparation 

These  financial  statements  have  been  prepared  in  accordance  with  applicable  United  Kingdom  Accounting 
standards, including Financial Reporting Standard 102 -The Financial Reporting Standard applicable in the UK and 
Republic of Ireland (“FRS 102”) and with the Companies Act 2006.  The financial statements have been prepared 
under the historical cost convention. 

The financial statements are prepared in sterling rounded to the nearest thousand pounds (£’000). 

The company has taken advantage of the exemption from disclosing the following information in its company 
only accounts, as permitted by the reduced disclosure regime within FRS 102: 

• 

Section 7 ‘Statement of Cash Flows’ – Presentation of a Statement of Cash Flow and related notes and 
disclosures 

Profit and loss account 

Under section 408(4) of the Companies Act 2006 the Company is exempt from the requirement to present its 
own profit and loss account.  The loss/profit for the year ended 31 March 2020 is disclosed in the Statement of 
Changes in Equity. 

Going concern 

The going concern basis  of  accounting  has  been used  in  the  preparation  of  these  financial  statements.    The 
Directors have not identified any material uncertainties in this regard. 

Foreign currencies 

Foreign currency transactions are translated at the rates ruling when they occurred.   Foreign currency monetary 
assets and liabilities are translated at the rate of exchange ruling at the statement of financial position date.  Any 
differences are taken to the statement of comprehensive income. 

Investments in subsidiaries 

Investments in subsidiaries are stated at cost less amounts provided for impairment. When the trade and assets 
of a subsidiary are consolidated / re-organised the investment is re-allocated based on the cost method where 
the commercial substance and economic reality is that the Investment carrying value remains intact. The carrying 
value of the revised investments are evaluated for impairment in accordance with FRS102. 

Other financial liabilities 

Other financial liabilities are accounted for on the same basis as in the consolidated accounts see accounting 
policy on page 84 as there is no material difference between FRS102 and IFRS. 

Share based payment 

Share based payments are accounted for on the same basis as in the consolidated accounts see accounting policy 
on page 87 as there is no material difference between FRS102 and IFRS. 

Treasury Shares 

Treasury shares are accounted for on the same basis as in the consolidated accounts see accounting policy on 
page 85 as there is no material difference between FRS102 and IFRS. 

120 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020  

2. 

STAFF COSTS 

Staff costs amounted £1,952k (2019: £925k) and comprised the share based payment expense of £381k (2019: 
£300k) provision for employer’s national insurance on exercise of share options of £52k (2019: £41k). 

Included within the Company Staff costs are the salary and related costs in respect of Mr A B Frere, Mr G S Marsh, 
Mr P O James, Mr J Lavery (retired 31 August 2019), Mr N F Rogers (appointed 1 July 2019) and Mr P Haining. No 
other Directors remuneration was paid by the Company. Details of the Directors whose emoluments were paid 
by other Group companies are given in the Remuneration Committee Report on page 46 to 59. 

3. 

SHARE BASED PAYMENT 

See Group share based payments disclosures in note 28 to the Group accounts. 

4. 

INVESTMENTS 

Subsidiary undertakings 

Cost 
1 April 
Additions 

31 March 

Net book value 
31 March 

2020 
£’000 

13,320 
(65) 
_______ 

13,255 
_______ 

2019 
£’000 

9,508 
3,812 
_______ 

13,320 
_______ 

13,255 
_______ 

13,320 
_______ 

The movement in the period relates to an immaterial true up of the investment value in respect of the 
acquisition of the Pacer Group which was completed in the prior year. 

Subsidiary undertakings 

Net book value of investment in: 
Steatite limited 
Solid State Supplies Limited 
Pacer Technologies Limited 

Total investments at 31 March 

Subsidiary undertakings 

See Group subsidiary undertakings disclosures in note 14 to the Group accounts. 

5. 

DEBTORS 

Amounts owed by Group undertakings 
Other debtors 
Prepayments 

121 

2020 
£’000 

5,307 
4,201 
3,747 
_______ 

13,255 
_______ 

2020 
£’000 

4,351 
7 
12 
_______ 

4,370 
_______ 

2019 
£’000 

5,307 
4,201 
3,812 
_______ 

13,320 
_______ 

2019 
£’000 

6,193 
2 
10 
_______ 

6,205 
_______ 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2020  

6. 

CREDITORS – Amounts falling due within one year 

Amounts owed to Group undertakings 
Other taxes and social security costs 
Trade and other creditors 
Accruals 
Bank borrowings 

2020 
£’000 

9,434 
227 
47 
862 
333 
_______ 

10,903 
_______ 

2019 
£’000 

6,756 
88 
33 
187 
1,333 
_______ 

8,397 
_______ 

The Company has guaranteed bank borrowings of all its subsidiary undertakings, the main trading subsidiaries 
are Solid State Supplies Limited, Steatite Limited, Pacer Components Limited  and Pacer LLC. At the year end the 
liabilities  covered  by  those guarantees  amounted  to  £nil (2019:  £nil).   The  Company  accounts  for guarantees 
provided to Group companies as insurance contracts, recognising a liability only to the extent that it is probable 
the guarantees will be called upon. 

7. 

CREDITORS – Amounts falling due after more than one year 

Bank borrowings 

2020 
£’000 

- 
_______ 

- 
_______ 

2019 
£’000 

4,334 
_______ 

4,334 
_______ 

8. 

SHARE CAPITAL 

See Group share capital disclosures in note 25 to the Group accounts. 

9. 

RESERVES 

See Group reserves disclosures in note 26 to the Group accounts. 

10.  OWN SHARES HELD IN TREASURY 

See Group treasury shares disclosures in note 27 to the Group accounts. 

11. 

LEASING COMMITMENTS 

The company’s future minimum payments under operating leases are as follows: 

Within one year 
Between one and five years 
Later than five years 

2020 
£’000 
- 
- 
- 
_______ 

2019 
£’000 
- 
- 
- 
_______ 

122 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
EXPLANATION OF AGM RESOLUTION 

SOLID STATE PLC LONG TERM INCENTIVE PLAN 2020 – SHAREHOLDER SUMMARY AND EXPLANATION OF THE PLAN 
TO BE ADOPTED VIA RESOLUTION (10) 

The Directors of Solid State Plc (the Company) would like to incentivise certain senior employees with nominal cost 
equity awards. The Board is therefore proposing to adopt the Solid State Plc Long Term Incentive Plan 2020 (LTIP) to 
allow employees to be granted the right (Awards) to acquire Ordinary Shares in the Company (Shares) subject, to the 
LTIP Rules. The LTIP is not subject to any HMRC qualifying conditions and is not expected to confer any tax 
advantages. 

The Awards are subject to time and performance-based vesting conditions. 

The principal terms of the LTIP are summarised below:  

Eligibility and Grant of LTIP Awards 

The Board (acting through the remuneration committee) may grant LTIP Awards to selected employees. The Awards 
may be granted during: 

a) the period of 42 days after the date of Award of the LTIP; 

b) any period of 42 days immediately following the end of a closed period; or 

c) in any other prior that the Board decides due to exceptional circumstances that justify such a decision. 

No Awards may be granted more than 10 years after the date of Award of the LTIP or when otherwise prohibited by 
law or regulation. 

No Awards may be granted that do not comply with the Directors’ remuneration policy. 

Exercise Price 

The price payable to acquire Shares on the exercise of the Awards will be the nominal value (5p per share).  The LTIP 
permits the grant of Nil-cost or Market Value Awards but neither are proposed. 

Performance Conditions 

The Awards will be subject to achieving performance conditions which are set out when the Awards are granted. 

The Board may vary of waive performance conditions provided such variation or waiver is reasonable and it: 

a) 

b) 

c) 

is a fairer measure of performance than the original performance condition; 

is no more difficult to satisfy than the original performance condition; and  

is not materially easier to satisfy than the original performance condition was at the date of grant of the Award. 

Clawback and malus provisions will apply in certain circumstances as set out in the Rules and if determined by the Board. 

Exercise and lapse of Awards 

Subject to the satisfaction of the relevant performance conditions, LTIP Awards normally vest from the third anniversary 
of the grant of the Award but will be subject to a retention until the fifth anniversary. 

For certain Award Holders who are not ‘good leavers’ and who cease to be employed by the Group before the 
Options vest (except for special reasons mentioned below) before their CSOP Options become exercisable, a 
time based proportion will normally lapse and the remaining options can be exercised before they lapse 90 
days following cessation. 

123 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
EXPLANATION OF AGM RESOLUTION 

SOLID STATE PLC LONG TERM INCENTIVE PLAN 2020 – SHAREHOLDER SUMMARY AND EXPLANATION OF THE PLAN 
TO BE ADOPTED VIA RESOLUTION (10) 

Special  rules  apply  if  cessation  is  due  to  injury,  ill  health,  disability,  retirement,  redundancy,  and/or  the  employing 
company/business  being  transferred  out  of  the  group,  so  that  participants  may  exercise  Awards,  to  the  extent 
performance  conditions  have  been  achieved  or,  in  the  case  of  death,  disability  or  injury,  to  the  extent  the  Board 
determines they have been achieved.  

On a takeover, change of control, liquidation or similar event, the Awards will be exercisable during a limited period 
subject to determination of the achievement of performance conditions and will then lapse. For initial Awards in the 
first 2 years made following approval of the LTIP, it is proposed that such Awards will vest and become exercisable if 
there  is  a  takeover,  liquidation,  change  of  control  (or  similar  event)  within  five  years  of  grant  even  if  performance 
conditions have not been satisfied. 

Limits 

The value of shares subject to annual Awards shall exceed 100% of  annual basic salary per participant but the Board 
may increase this to 300% in exceptional circumstances. 

The Company may not grant an LTIP Award if that grant would result in the total number of Shares to be issued when 
added to any other Awards/awards granted in the preceding 10 years under any share incentive scheme, including the 
LTIP, but excluding any share plan available to all employees, to exceed 10% of the issued share capital of the Company 
from time to time. 

It is proposed that no more than 5% shall be made available for LTIP Awards. 

Tax Liabilities 

For the proposed Award grants, any secondary Class 1 NIC (employer) liability that arises in respect of the LTIP shall be 
met by the employer of the Award holder. There is power to pass this liability to participants for future awards. 

Variation of Share Capital 

On an alteration of the ordinary share capital of the Company by capitalisation or rights issue, consolidation, sub-division 
or reduction, or other alteration, the Board shall adjust the number of shares subject to or the Award price may be 
adjusted by the Board in such manner as the auditors or other valuers confirm to be fair and reasonable. The Exercise 
Price may not be reduced below the nominal value per share (5p). 

If  there  is  an  extraordinary  distribution  to  shareholders  (including  a  demerger  or  special  dividend),  the  Board  may 
determine that a number of shares may be released under the Award as is reasonable.  

Amendment 

The Board may amend the Plan however there are restrictions on the amendments which can be made. More 
significant amendments will require the prior approval of the Company in general meeting. 

Voting, Dividend and Other Rights 

On exercise, shares issued are ranked pari passu but, until then, Award holders have no voting or dividend rights.  The 
rights under the LTIP Awards are not pensionable. 

A full copy of the rules of the LTIP will be available at the place of the general meeting for at least 15 minutes before 
and during the meeting and, from the date of this notice, at the offices of Solid State Plc. 

124 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
EXPLANATION OF AGM RESOLUTION 

SOLID STATE PLC COMPANY SHARE OPTION PLAN 2020 – SHAREHOLDER SUMMARY AND EXPLANATION OF THE PLAN 
TO BE ADOPTED VIA RESOLUTION (11) 

The Directors of Solid State Plc (the Company) would like to incentivise the Company’s employees with equity awards. 
Therefore, the Board is proposing to adopt the Solid State Plc Company Share Option Plan 2020 (CSOP) to allow 
employees to be granted the right (CSOP Options) to acquire Ordinary Shares in the Company (Shares) subject, to the 
CSOP Rules.  

The CSOP is split into two parts: Part A is intended to meet the requirements Schedule 4 of Income Tax (Earnings and 
Pensions) Act 2003 (ITEPA) and benefit from statutory tax advantages.  Part B is not subject to statutory qualifying 
restrictions and is not intended to confer any tax benefits.   

The CSOP Options will be subject to time-based vesting conditions and performance conditions to be applied at the 
time options are granted. 

The principal terms of the Plan are summarised below: Part A and Part B are identical except as noted. 

Eligibility and Grant of CSOP Options 

The Board (normally through the remuneration committee) may grant CSOP Options to selected employees but only 
Directors who work at least 25 hours per week for the Group and individuals.  Under Part B there is no limit on Director’s 
hours and non-employees may be considered at the discretion of the Board.  

The Options may be granted during: 

a) the period of 42 days after the date of adoption of the CSOP; 

b) any period of 42 days immediately following the end of a closed period; or 

c) in any other prior that the Board decides due to exceptional circumstances that justify such a decision. 

No Options may be granted more than 10 years after the date of adoption of the CSOP or when otherwise prohibited 
by law or regulation. 

Exercise Price 

The price payable to acquire Shares on the exercise of the CSOP Options will be not materially less than the market 
value (or nominal value if higher) of the Shares at the date of grant.  

Market  value  will  be  determined  in  accordance  with  the  relevant  tax  legislation  and  the  methodology  agreed  with 
HMRC: this is usually the mid-market closing price of the Shares on the trading day immediately before the grant or as 
agreed with HMRC. 

Exercise and lapse of Options 

CSOP Options are exercisable during the period fixed by the Board and this is intended to be at any time from between 
the  third  and  tenth  anniversary  of  the  grant  of  the  option,  subject  to  the  satisfaction  of  an  objective  performance 
condition imposed by the Board at grant.  Performance conditions may be varied so long as they are not more difficult 
or materially easier to satisfy than the original performance condition. 

125 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
EXPLANATION OF AGM RESOLUTION 

SOLID STATE PLC COMPANY SHARE OPTION PLAN 2020 – SHAREHOLDER SUMMARY AND EXPLANATION OF THE PLAN 
TO BE ADOPTED VIA RESOLUTION (11) 

For Option Holders who cease to be employed by the Group (except for special reasons mentioned below) before their 
CSOP  Options  become  exercisable,  a  time  based  proportion  will  normally  lapse  and  the  remaining  options  can  be 
exercised before they lapse 90 days following cessation. 

If the employee leaves before their CSOP Options become exercisable for reasons of injury, ill health, disability, or death 
there is no apportionment but performance conditions must be satisfied.  

If  the  employee  leaves  before  their  CSOP  Options  become  exercisable  for  reasons  of  injury,  ill  health,  disability, 
retirement, redundancy, and/or the employing company/business being transferred out of the group, then all options 
which have not otherwise lapsed or been exercised can be exercised within six months following the cessation. 

If the Option Holder leaves after the CSOP Option becomes exercisable for any reason other than summary dismissal, 
they may exercise the entirety of their option during the 90 days after cessation of employment. 

If the Option Holder dies, the Option will lapse one the first anniversary of death (in which case options are exercisable 
by personal representatives of the option holder). 

CSOP  Options  are  exercisable  in  limited  circumstances  following  a  change  of  control  of  the  Company,  on 
commencement of a winding up, or on a court sanctioned reconstruction or amalgamation and will thereafter lapse.   

CSOP Options are personal and will lapse on assignment or other transfer by the eligible employee, except to a personal 
representative.  

Limits 

The individual limit for CSOP Option under Part A is the statutory limit, currently, £30,000 (being the market value of 
Shares under option at the date of grant) or such other limit as the legislation permits. There is no limit under Part B. 

The Company may not grant a CSOP Option if that grant would result in the total number of Shares to be issued when 
added to any other options/awards granted in the preceding 10 years under any share incentive scheme, including the 
Plan but excluding any share plan available to all employees, to exceed 10% of the issued share capital of the Company 
from time to time. 

Tax Liabilities 

For the proposed option grants, any secondary Class 1 NIC (employer) liability that arises in respect of the options 
under Part A and Part B shall be met by the employer of the option holder. There is power to pass this liability to 
participants for future awards. 

Variation of Share Capital 

On an alteration of the ordinary share capital of the Company by capitalisation or rights issue, consolidation, sub-division 
or reduction, or other alteration, the number of shares subject to or the option price may be adjusted by the Board in 
such manner as the auditors or other valuers confirm to be fair and reasonable and, for CSOP Options granted under 
Part A, satisfies the statutory requirements. 

126 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
EXPLANATION OF AGM RESOLUTION 

SOLID STATE PLC COMPANY SHARE OPTION PLAN 2020 – SHAREHOLDER SUMMARY AND EXPLANATION OF THE PLAN 
TO BE ADOPTED VIA RESOLUTION (11) 

Amendment 

The Board may amend the Plan however there are restrictions on the amendments which can be made.  

For Part A, no amendment may be made to a key feature of the CSOP if the CSOP qualifying status will be lost. 

Material amendments are subject to the consent of the affected Option Holder.  

The prior approval of the Company in general meeting is required to increase limits, to make the CSOP Options 
materially more generous, to expand the participants or to alter the rule on the relationship with employment 
contracts, unless it is minor to benefit the administration of the CSOP, takes account of a change in legislation or to 
obtain or maintain favourable tax, exchange control or regulatory treatment for participants or the Company or a 
member of its group. 

Voting, Dividend and Other Rights 

On exercise, shares issued are ranked pari passu but, until then, option holders have no voting or dividend rights.  The 
rights under the CSOP Options are not pensionable. 

A full copy of the rules of the CSOP will be available at the place of the general meeting for at least 15 minutes before 
and during the meeting and, from the date of this notice, at the offices of Solid State Plc. 

127 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
EXPLANATION OF AGM RESOLUTION 

EXPLANATORY  NOTES  OF  PRINCIPAL  CHANGES  TO  THE  COMPANY’S  ARTICLES  OF  ASSOCIATION  WHICH  ARE 
PROPOSED TO BE ADOPTED IN RESOLUTION (12) 

1. 

Articles which duplicate statutory provisions  

Provisions in the Current Articles which replicate provisions contained in the Companies Act 2006 are in the main to be 
amended in the New Articles to bring them into line with the Companies Act 2006. Certain examples of such provisions 
include provisions as to the form of the resolutions, the variation of class rights, the requirement to keep accounting 
records and provisions regarding the period of notice required to convene general meetings.  The main changes made 
to reflect this approach are detailed below.  

2. 

Form of resolution  

The  Current  Articles  contain  provision  that,  where  for  any  purpose  an  ordinary  resolution  is  required,  a  special  or 
extraordinary resolution is also effective and that, where an extraordinary resolution is required, a special resolution is 
also effective.  This provision is being amended as the concept of extraordinary resolutions has not been retained under 
the Companies Act 2006.  

3. 

Convening extraordinary and annual general meetings 

The provisions in the Current Articles dealing with the convening of general meetings and the length of notice required 
to convene general meetings are being amended to confirm to new provisions in the Companies Act 2006.  In particular 
a  general  meeting  to consider  a  special  resolution  can  be convened  on  14  days’  notice  whereas  previously  21  days’ 
notice  was required.   References  to Extraordinary General  meetings  have  been  removed  as  all meetings  other  than 
Annual General Meetings are just referred to as General Meetings in the Companies Act 2006. 

4. 

Votes of members  

Under  the  Companies  Act  2006  proxies are  entitled  to  vote  on  a  show  of  hands  whereas  under  the  Current  Articles 
proxies are only entitled to vote on a poll. Multiple proxies may be appointed provided that each proxy is appointed to 
exercise  the rights  attached  to  a different  share  held  by  the  shareholder.   The New  Articles  reflect  all  of  these  new 
provisions.  

5 

Conflicts of Interest  

The Companies Act 2006 sets out Directors’ general duties which largely codify the existing law but with some changes.  
Under the Companies Act, from 1 October 2008 a Director must avoid a situation where he has, or can have, a direct or 
indirect interest that conflicts, or possibly may conflict with the company’s interests.  The requirement is very broad 
and could apply, for example, if a Director becomes a Director of another company or a trustee of another organisation.  
The  Companies  Act  2006  allows  Directors  of  public  companies  to  authorise  conflicts  and  provided  conflicts,  where 
appropriate, where the articles of association contain a provision to this effect.  The Companies Act 2006 also allows 
the articles of association to contain other provisions for dealing with Directors’ conflicts of interest to avoid a breach 
of duty. The New Articles give the Directors authority to approve such situations and to include other provisions to allow 
conflicts of interest to be dealt with in a similar way to the current position.  

There are safeguards which will apply when Directors decide whether to authorise a conflict or potential conflict.  Firstly, 
only  Directors  who  have  no  interest  in  the  matter  being  considered  will  be  able  to  take  the  relevant  decision,  and 
secondly,  in  taking  the  decision  the  Directors  must  act  in  a  way  they  consider,  in  good  faith,  will  be  most  likely  to 
promote the company’s success.  The Directors will be able to impose limits or conditions when giving authorisation if 
they think this is appropriate.  

It is also proposed that the New Articles should contain provisions relating to confidential information, attendance at 
board meetings and availability of board papers to protect a  Director being in breach of duty if a conflict of interest 
arises.    These  provisions  will  only  apply  where  the  position  giving  rise  to  the  potential  conflict  has  previously  been 
authorised by the Directors.  It is the Board’s intention to report annually on the Company’s procedures for ensuring 
that the Board’s powers to authorise conflicts are operated effectively.  

128 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
EXPLANATION OF AGM RESOLUTION 

EXPLANATORY NOTES OF PRINCIPAL CHANGES TO THE COMPANY’S ARTICLES OF ASSOCIATION 

6. 

Electronic and web communications  

Provisions of the Companies Act 2006 which came into force in January 2007 enable companies to communicate with 
members  by  electronic  and/or  website  communications.    The  Company  passed  a  resolution  allowing  electronic 
communications.  The New Articles codify this by allowing communications to members in electronic form and they also 
permit the Company to take advantage of the new provisions relating to website communications.   

7. 

General 

Generally, the opportunity has been taken to bring clearer language. 

129 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTICE OF ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING 

The annual general meeting is being held at the registered office of the company in the usual way and in accordance 
with the current Articles of Association. However, in order to comply with Government public health guidance and rules, 
the venue is subject to social distancing rules which limit the number of people who can be accommodated in the room.  

We would therefore request that shareholders do not attend the meeting in person but instead appoint the Chairman 
of the meeting as a proxy by completing the proxy card and indicating how they wish to vote on the card.  

However, if any shareholders are intending to attend the meeting in person, we would request that they register this 
intention at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting at (investor.information@solidstateplc.com). This will ensure that  
adequate precautions can be taken to ensure that the social distancing guidelines are followed. 

Notice is hereby given that the annual general meeting of Solid State PLC will be held at 2, Ravensbank Business Park, 
Hedera Road Redditch B98 9EY, on 9 September 2020 at 9.30am for the following purposes: 

(1) 

(2) 

(3) 

(4) 

(5) 

(6) 

(7) 

(8) 

(9) 

ORDINARY RESOLUTIONS 

To receive  the  accounts for  the  year  ended  31  March  2020,  together  with  the reports  of  the Directors  and 
auditors thereon.  (Resolution 1) 

To approve the Directors’ Annual Report on Remuneration (this is an advisory vote). (Resolution 2) 

To declare a final dividend of 7.25p per share.  (Resolution 3) 

To reappoint Mr Gary Marsh, who retires by rotation, as a Director of the Company in accordance with the 
Company’s Articles of Association.  (Resolution 4) 

To reappoint Mr Peter James, who retires by rotation, as a Director of the Company in accordance with the 
Company’s Articles of Association.  (Resolution 5) 

To reappoint Mr Nigel Foster Rogers, being a Director of the Company appointed since the last annual general 
meeting, in accordance with the Company’s Articles of Association.  (Resolution 6) 

To reappoint RSM UK Audit LLP as auditors of the Company.  (Resolution 7) 

To authorise the Directors to fix the auditors’ remuneration.  (Resolution 8) 

To pass the following resolution: 

That  the  Directors  be  generally  and  unconditionally  authorised  to  allot  shares  in  the  Company  (Relevant 
Securities): 

i) 

comprising equity securities (as defined by section 560 of the Companies Act 2006) up to an aggregate 
nominal amount of £141,056.52 (which is 33% of the issued share capital) (such amount to be reduced 
by the nominal amount of any Relevant Securities allotted under paragraph (ii) below) in connection with 
an offer by way of a rights issue: 

(a)  to  holders  of  ordinary  shares  in  proportion  (as  nearly  as  may  be  practicable)  to  their  respective 
holdings; and 

(b) to holders of other equity securities as required by the rights of those securities or as the Directors 
otherwise consider necessary, 

but subject to such exclusions or other arrangements as the Board may deem necessary or expedient in 
relation to treasury shares, fractional entitlements, record dates, legal or practical problems in or under 
the laws of any territory or the requirements of any regulatory body or stock exchange; and 

130 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTICE OF ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING (continued) 

ii) 

in any other case, up to an aggregate nominal amount of £85,488.80 (which is 20% of the issued share 
capital)  (such  amount  to  be  reduced  by  the  nominal  amount  of  any  equity  securities  allotted  under 
paragraph i) above, provided that this authority shall, unless renewed, varied or revoked by the Company, 
expire after a period of 18 months from the passing of this resolution or, if earlier, the date of the next 
annual general meeting of the Company save that the Company may, before such expiry, make offers or 
agreements which would or might require Relevant Securities to be allotted and the Directors may allot 
Relevant Securities in pursuance of such offer or agreement notwithstanding that the authority conferred 
by this resolution has expired. 

This resolution revokes and replaces all unexercised authorities previously granted to the Directors to allot 
Relevant Securities but without prejudice to any allotment of shares or grant of rights already made, offered 
or agreed to be made pursuant to such authorities.  (Resolution 9) 

(10) 

To pass the following resolution: 

That the Solid State plc Long-term Incentive Plan, (LTIP) be and is hereby approved in the form of the rules 
initialled by the Chairman for identification purposes and summarised in the Letter to Shareholders dated 30 
June 2020 be and is hereby approved and that the Board of Directors of the Company be and is authorised to 
adopt the LTIP and to grant awards under the LTIP in accordance with those rules. (Resolution 10) 

(11) 

To pass the following resolution: 

That the Solid State plc Company Share Option Plan 2020, Part A and Part B, (Plan) be and is hereby approved 
in  the  form  of  the  rules  initialled  by  the  Chairman  for  identification  purposes  and  summarised  in  the 
explanatory note above be and is hereby approved and that the Board of Directors of the Company be and is 
authorised to adopt the Plan and to grant options under the Plan in accordance with those rules. (Resolution 
11) 

SPECIAL RESOLUTIONS 

(12)         Adoption of new articles of association:  

The principal changes introduced in the New Articles are summarised in the Appendix. Other changes, which 
are of a minor, technical or clarifying nature and also some more minor changes which merely reflect changes 
made by the Companies Act 2006 have not been noted in the Explanatory notes above. The New Articles are 
available for inspection as per note 13 below. (Resolution 12) 

(13) 

To pass the following resolution: 

That the Company is authorised to allot equity securities pursuant to resolution 9 above up to an aggregate 
nominal amount of £42,744.40, which is 10% of the issued share capital, as if Section 561 of the Companies Act 
2006 (existing shareholders – right of pre-emption): 

i) 

ii) 

did not apply to the allotment; or 

applied to the allotment with such modifications as the Directors may determine provided that this 
authority shall, unless renewed, varied or revoked by the company, expire after a period of 18 months 
from the passing of this resolution save that the company may, before such expiry, make offers or 
agreements which would or might require equity securities to be allotted and the Directors may allot 
equity  securities  in  pursuance  of  such  offer  or  agreement  not  withstanding  that  the  authority 
conferred by the resolution has expired.  (Resolution 13) 

131 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
NOTICE OF ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING (continued) 

(14) 

To pass the following resolution: 

That the Company is, pursuant to Section 701 of the Companies Act 2006, hereby generally and unconditionally 
authorised  to  make  market  purchases  (within  the  meaning  of  Section  693  of  the  Companies  Act  2006)  of 
ordinary shares of 5p each in the capital of the Company (“ordinary shares”) provided that:- 

i) 

ii) 

iii) 

iv) 

v) 

vi) 

the minimum price which may be paid for the ordinary shares is 5p per ordinary share; 

the  maximum  price  that  may  be  paid  for  such  shares  is,  in  respect  of  a  share  contracted  to  be 
purchased on any day, an amount (exclusive of all expenses) equal to 105 per cent  of the average 
middle market quotations of the ordinary shares of the company as derived from the Daily Official List 
of the London Stock Exchange on the 10 dealing days immediately preceding the day on which the 
shares are contracted to be purchased; 

the  authority  hereby  conferred  shall  expire  after  a  period  of  18  months  from  the  passing  of  this 
resolution unless such authority is renewed prior to such expiry; 
the authority hereby conferred is in substitution for any existing authority to purchase ordinary shares 
under the said Section 701; 
the Company may make a contract to purchase ordinary shares under the authority hereby conferred 
prior to the expiry of such authority which will be executed wholly or partly after the expiry of such 
authority and may make a purchase or purchases of ordinary shares in pursuance of any such contract; 
and 
the maximum number of ordinary shares hereby authorised to be purchased by the Company does 
not exceed 15 per cent of the issued ordinary share capital of the Company at the date of the passing 
of this resolution.  (Resolution 14) 

BY ORDER OF THE BOARD 

P Haining FCA 
Secretary 
30 June 2010 

Registered office: 2 Ravensbank Business Park, Hedera Road, Redditch, B98 9EY 

132 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTICE OF ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING (continued) 

NOTES: 

Entitlement to attend and vote 

1.  Only those members registered on the Company’s register of members at close of business 2 days before the 

time appointed for the meeting, or if this meeting is adjourned, at close of business on the day two days prior to 
the adjourned meeting shall be entitled to attend and vote at this meeting. 

Attending in person 

2. 

If you wish to attend the meeting in person, please bring photographic identification with you to the meeting. 

Appointment of proxies 

3. 

4. 

If you are a member of the company at the time set out in note 1 above, you are entitled to appoint a proxy to 
exercise all or any of your rights to attend, speak and vote at the meeting and you should have received a proxy 
form with this notice of meeting.  You can only appoint a proxy using the procedures set out in these notes and 
the notes to the proxy form. 

If you are not a member of the company but you have been nominated by a member of the company to enjoy 
information rights, you do not have a right to appoint any proxies under the procedures set out in this 
“Appointment of proxies” section. 

5.  A proxy does not need to be a member of the company but must attend the Meeting to represent you.  Details 

of how to appoint the Chairman of the Meeting or another person as your proxy using the proxy form are set out 
in the notes to the proxy form. 

6.  You may appoint more than one proxy provided each proxy is appointed to exercise rights attached to different 

shares.  You may not appoint more than one proxy to exercise rights attached to any one share. 

7.  A vote withheld is not a vote in law, which means that the vote will not be counted in the circulation of votes for 
or against the resolution.  If no voting indication is given, your proxy will vote or abstain from voting at his or her 
discretion. Your proxy will vote (or abstain from voting) as he or she thinks fit in relation to any other matter 
which is put before the Meeting. 

Appointment of proxy using hard copy proxy form 

8.  The notes to the proxy form explain how to direct your proxy how to vote on each resolution or withhold their 

vote.  To appoint a proxy using the proxy form, the form must be completed and signed and sent or delivered to 
Neville Registrars Limited, Neville House, Steelpark Road, Halesowen, B62 8HD, not later than 48 hours before the 
time appointed for the Meeting. The completion and return of a form of proxy will not, however, preclude 
shareholders from attending and voting in person at the Meeting. 

In the case of a member which is a company, the proxy form must be executed under its common seal or signed 
on its behalf by an officer of the company or an attorney for the company. 

Any power of attorney or any other authority under which the proxy form is signed (or a duly certified copy of 
such power of authority) must be included with the proxy form. 

Appointment of proxy joint members 

9. 

In the case of joint holders, where more than one of the joint holders purports to appoint a proxy, only the 
appointment submitted by the most senior holder will be accepted,  Seniority is determined by the order in which 
the names of the joint holders appear in the Company’s register of members in respect of the joint holding (the 
first-named being the most senior). 

133 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTICE OF ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING (continued) 

NOTES: 

Changing proxy instructions 

10.  To change your proxy instructions simply submit a new proxy appointment using the methods set out above.  
Note that the cut-off time for receipt of proxy appointments (see above) also apply in relation to amended 
instructions; and amended proxy appointment received after the relevant cut-off time will be disregarded. 

Where you have appointed a proxy using the hard-copy proxy form and would like to change the instructions 
using another hard-copy proxy form, please contact Neville Registrars Limited, Neville House, Steelpark Road, 
Halesowen, B62 8HD. 

If you submit more than one valid proxy appointment, the appointment received last before the latest time for 
the receipt of proxies will take precedence. 

Termination of proxy appointments 

11.  In order to revoke a proxy instruction, you will need to inform the Company using one of the following methods: 

a.  By sending a signed hard copy notice clearly stating your intention to revoke your proxy appoint to Neville 

Registrars Limited, Neville House, Steelpark Road, Halesowen, B62 8HD. 

b. 

In the case of a member which is a company, the revocation notice must be executed under its common seal 
or signed on its behalf by an officer of the Company or an attorney for the company.  Any power of attorney 
or any other authority under which the revocation notice is signed (or a duly certified copy of such power of 
authority) must be included with the revocation notice. 

In either case, the revocation notice must be received by the Neville Registrars Limited, Neville House, Steelpark 
Road, Halesowen, B62 8HD, not later than 48 hours before the time appointed for the Meeting. 

Appointment of a proxy does not preclude you from attending the Meeting and voting in person.  If you have 
appointed a proxy and attend the Meeting in person, your proxy appointment will automatically be terminated. 

Issued shares and total voting rights 

12.  As at 30 June 2020 the Company’s issued share capital comprised of 8,548,878 ordinary shares of 5p each which 
includes 7,374 shares held in treasury.  Each ordinary share carries the right to one vote at a general meeting of 
the Company and, therefore, the total number of voting rights in the Company as at 2 July 2019 8,541,504. 

Documents on display 

13.  The following documents will be available for inspection at the place of the Annual General Meeting prior to the 

meeting until the time of the Meeting and for at least 15 minutes prior to the meeting: 

a.  The register of Directors’ interests in the share capital and debentures of the Company; and  

b.  Copies of service agreements under which Directors of the Company are employed 

c.  The full rules of the LTIP 

d.  The full rules of the CSOP  

e.  Copies of the new Articles of Association of Solid State PLC Company No 00771335. 

134 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
135